31B-295 r
r
r
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to
junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit
1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit
to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with
cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at
ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished
floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall
mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height
shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor,
unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall
check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein
without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor
insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4"back of
finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with
covers.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufact,xer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
pot, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.6 TESTING
A. Balancing Loads:
1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed
equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall
be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main
distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if
AOW requested by the Public Works Department.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -21
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual
measurements and those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades
might interfere with his,the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the
plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has
been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The
entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code
and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be
made accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic
parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non- '"w""
metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The
ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed
under this Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and
equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of
connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved
termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code
and other applicable specification standards.
D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of
flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other
equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire
shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components
by means of positively secured ground clamp in each.
3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more
than the equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary,
the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably
protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -20
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop,
including Outlet IO and Pass/Fail status.
S. System Documentation:
1. Prepare and submit four(4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly
bound as outlined in this Specification.
2. Manual to include:
a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch
points identified.
b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed.
C. A record of the dynamic test results, both data communication simulation
and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer
(TDR)measurements of the individual cable segments.
d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant,
component and node locations.
e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's
reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the
original design.
2.14 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet)
A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed(including
cabling)by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a
call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series.
C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel
plate marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6) long nylon pull cord.
D. X he combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime
tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all
required transformers.
E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal
cancellation must be made at the point of origin.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -19
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College �**
Northampton,Massachusetts
tape markers or equivalent.
7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment.
8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes,
wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie
as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing
between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once
in each enclosure.
9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and
equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection.
Q. Acceptance Testing
1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner
during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for
acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum
of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be
completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy.
2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the
work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of
the acceptance tests.
R. Testing and Inspection
1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required
by codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and
inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities.
Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to
testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection.
2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain
reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE
Specifications. The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the
following Specifications when tested from each end.
a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence.
b. Distance: Less than 90 meters.
C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB.
d. Near end crosstalk(NEXT) at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.1) Db.
e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS (18.8 loopback).
f. Noise: Less than 100 mv.
g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one
at TDR, and one at signal injector.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -18
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. All cables will be labeled at both ends, with room number and floor.
N. Field Quality Control
1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the
installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other
trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This
person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment
set-up and testing.
O. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring)
1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances,
regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited
to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all
items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification.
2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide
fastenings and supports adequate to support loads.
3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc.,plumb and square. Adjust layout
as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide
maximum safety to future operators.
4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable
terminations.
P. Wiring
1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices.
Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit.
2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment.
1 Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits
exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum.
4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. .
a. Pulling tensions.
b. Quantities.
C. Types.
d. Lengths.
e. Routing.
f. Wire group separation.
g. Identification.
5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden
type 9451, or equivalent,unless otherwise specified.
6. All wires shall be pennanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z"
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -17
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices.
b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination.
C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each
cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each
splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with
2.13.M, "Labeling" of this section.
4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls,
and other partitions of building construction.
5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall,
Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull
and label as specified.
K. Testing of Data Cables
1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds,
and pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the
Contractor. Open and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the
problem is caused by faulty termination. If the termination is proper, the bad
pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch down sheets.
2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs, the entire cable shall be
replaced at no charge to the Owner.
3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5
cable.
L. Grounding
1. All equipment racks,housings, and raceways shall be grounded.
2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be
connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the
grounding systems conductors in that area.
3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum.
M. Labeling
1. Each cable shall be labeled:
a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel.
b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block.
2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear
overwrap to protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear
overwrap shall cover the entire legend. -OW.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -16
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Frequency Max. Attenuation Min Crosstalk
1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft. 62 dB/1,000 Ft.
4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft. 53 dB/1,000 Ft.
10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft. 47 dB/1,000 Ft.
16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft. 44 dB/1,000 Ft.
20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft. 42 dB/1,000 Ft.
100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft. 32 dB/1,000 Ft.
3. Physical Characteristics
a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs.
b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in.
C. Nominal diameter: .217 in.
d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal.
4. Wall Plates and Connectors
a. Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as
manufactured by Hubbell.
1.. Data-Category 5 5110 Series.
2. Voice-FTJ Type
b. Data runs will be punched down (8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch
panels using EIA/TIA 568B standard.
C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks.
d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3)
port faceplates for combined voice/data locations.
5. Voice cable to be Category 3.
J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling
Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards
applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings.
a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications
for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when
installing all cables.
2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines:
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -15
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code.
Ground cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp; bond water
pipe sections as required by Section 250-81 MEC.
2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to
accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the
Owner.
B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment
mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic
covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable.
C. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and
cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and (1)
for future expansion.
D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified
by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan.
E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and
telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement
Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one(1) data and one (1) voice drop, run
from each outlet location to the Telephone Room.
G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel
terminations in Telephone Room.
H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks.
I. Data cabling shall be Category V, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as
manufactured by IBM, Belden, or AT&T.
1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications:
t a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare
CU, PVC jacket,4 pairs.
b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ: 4 PF/FT.
C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67%
d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT.
e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R. at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT.
f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS +/- 15%.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -14
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.10 PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and
where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded
case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as required.
B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating, and
have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by
the breaker handle taking position between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped.
Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or
"phase sequence"type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated.
D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as
suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both
breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be
used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence
down the right-hand side.
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the
inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long
00%, or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by
each circuit.
G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or
greater than 10,000 amps.
H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label.
Panelboards shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will
be allowed.
2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor)
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install a complete fire alarm system as shown on
Drawings. All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a
Simplex 4002 system complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus
_:Security as directed by the Owner.
B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
C. The building shall be wired on a "zone per floor" basis unless otherwise indicated by the
Owner.
2.12 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Electric service shall be 200 ampere, 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide new feeder (sized as shown on Plans) from
existing switch gear as directed by the Owner. Connect to service entrance equipment.
-' Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College ,,,
Northampton, Massachusetts
switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three
melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover
of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No
substitutions will be allowed.
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor
without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in
cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509.
No substitutions will be allowed.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter,
fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt.
d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by
others for interlocking purposes.
2.9 DISTRIBUTION PANELS
A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards
shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip
ratings as required.
B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings
shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector
or bus bar not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in
accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor
dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Buses shall be copper.
C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected
connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large
permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform posi-
tion. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position
between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no
additional connectors will be required to add breakers.
D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps.
E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to
be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in
accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on
d6or of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock.
All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Front trim shall be hinged.
F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main
lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to
be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be
barriered.
G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D
I-LINE. No Substitutions Accepted.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -12
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on
Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and
standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and
approved by the Architect and Owner.
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting, and controlling devices for motors.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required.
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off'position
with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion
and promote cool operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation
of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being
restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the
contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the
box,not the cover, with positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off'position.
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless
NEMA 3R (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-
deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC.
5. Fuses shall be as required.
6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
enclosure.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole
toggle switches as specified,or required.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA
Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose
enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
t
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy
contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or
removing starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without
removing the starter from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit
module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable.
The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College • ,
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with
Lexan base and lid,4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20-3-5-0,or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton
Cat. No. 5362-IG,or equal.
5. Light Switches, Single Pole -20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton
Cat. No. 1221-2, or equal.
6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 1223-2, or equal.
7. Light Switches, 4 Way- 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 1224-2, or equal.
8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle,
Leviton Cat. No. 1221-PLR, or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with
matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal,as follows:
a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No. 279.
b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole,4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278.
10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy
clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-1, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex,
style as chosen by Architect.
11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching
screws. To be Leviton Cat.No. 86000 series,or equal.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting
fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all
respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install
all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and
diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be
replaced.
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system
by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic
ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type,
complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps
shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K.
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal.
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise
noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the
cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and
gasket.
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. structural conditions.
2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering.
3. device of fixture for which required.
D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed.
E. Where multiple devices are located at one point,gang type boxes shall be used.
F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge.
G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and
screws,bonderized paint finished.
H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the
National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes.
1. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company,
General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal.
2.5 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety
switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw
attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval.
jr
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or
more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused
boxes to be furnished with blank plates.
1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back
wired. To be Leviton Cat.No. 5352-1, or equal.
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or
equal.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs
concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above
floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest
applicable Federal Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or
partitions, raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred
spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the
latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw
type.
C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable
equipment to facilitate removal and connections.
E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent
welded fittings.
2.2 WIREWAYS '
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with
applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported
as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the
necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of
the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access.
All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked
enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of
types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall
not be used.
B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid.
C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN, stranded.
D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger,Type THW, stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be
Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as
specified.
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
W4: Paint exterior building trim and clapboards Color A and wood shingles
Color B.
W5: Delete new shed dormer at third floor.
W6: Change specified radiation to fm tube radiation.
W7: Delete DDC controls to student rooms and install self contained control
valve equal to Macon.
2. Hopkins House
HI: Delete basement demolition, underpinning, excavation, and new supports
and foundations under the existing building.
H2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for
the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time
to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports
(ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location
for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to
co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new
walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit
and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The
Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart, if applicable.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective
during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
1.17 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the
Electrical Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
jeasonably incidental to providing all work specified and shown on the Drawings.
C. Schedule of Alternates
1. Wesley House
WI: Delete replacement windows.
W2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
W3: Refurbish student rooms per alternate schedule.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to
the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
delaying his work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the individual Contractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except
storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the
building.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name
of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents
yvith tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard
binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1 Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall
remain with the Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with
the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES, AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all pen-nits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the
work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Division 1.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in
Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
t
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in
the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items.
G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
protected by suitable means.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings
and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his
work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may
make in regard thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to
the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in
product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in
accordance with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S.
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the
same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical
materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard
requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes which may be required.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -3
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College .,
Northampton,Massachusetts
14. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation,
and which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as
required.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules,
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents
conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract
requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of
his work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising
as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is
agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of
damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and
binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to
-fiis materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring
such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such
failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all 11ft%
measurements.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -2
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1, as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work
under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or
indicated on the Drawings, including,but not limited to, the following:
1. New Electric Service to and Service Entrance Equipment in Wesley House and
relocated service to and service entrance in Hopkins House
2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit.
3. Feeders.
4. Panelboards.
5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
6. Telephone/Data System
7. Fire Alarm System.
8. Emergency Call For Aid System
9. Wiring devices and plates.
10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner
including final connections to equipment.
11. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
12. Guarantee and instructions.
13. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new
construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and
delivered to such places as designated by the Owner.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -1
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified
herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of
vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow.
The letters shall be V high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and
flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or
snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so
that markers are not over 50 feet on center.
C. Each valve,except runout valves,but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass
disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number,and a valve list shall be provided
under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve,the service and the valve
and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs
to the valves with brass"S"hooks or chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by
engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved
nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be
black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high.
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of
these Specifications has been accomplished.
3.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Filters: Each fan coil unit, and cabinet type unit haters shall be provided with three (3)
extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after
substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the
Owner.
B. Fan Coil Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one(1) spare fan coil unit motor for
each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner.
C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one(1)spare fan belt of each size furnished.
D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated
location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed
by the Owner's representative,who shall countersign the Certificate.
END OF SECTION
AM-
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-47
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3.7 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contactor
regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator
covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the
floor. Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed
with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge
sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes
over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to
the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the groper factory pre-cut insulation. The
ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge
adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one
piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe
covering.
3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not,
and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC
Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of thebuilding,
and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing
satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall
be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and
thoroughly cleaned including coils,plenums,under equipment and any and all other areas
t around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction
shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up.
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match
the adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-46
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the
test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence.
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be
removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other
temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting,joint, or
section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other
material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers.
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign
matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall
have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before
erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt
removed.
C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium
phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty
gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system
shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system
shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be
given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to
observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall
be repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by
litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side Oh
= 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side,the cleaning by the
use of tris�dium phosphate shall be repeated.
JI-
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-
leak"compounds to the system.
3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and
prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above
systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified,
indicated on the Drawings, or as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-45
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces,shafts,
chases,or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above
hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and
clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits,
lighting fixtures,other piping,ducts,and equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future
replacement,removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to
isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment,
shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all
traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for
additional requirements.
G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with theOwner.
The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if
required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and
operational.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be
hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all
equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a
time in order to facilitate the construction.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the
section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any
insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed.
t
Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is
not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under
test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs
does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE"
value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,Code for Pressure Piping,Building Services Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-44
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
PART 3 -INSTALLATION
3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise
without filters in place and permission from the Owner.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units
and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the
units are turned on,and clean filters shall be installed.
3.2 CUTTING,PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and
ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting
and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General
Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be
checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other
Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the
corrections as his own expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves and inserts were not installed,or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor
shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after
installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor.
C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a
location approved by the Engineer.
D. - No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the
HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
3.3 PIPE
jNSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly
supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets
or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed
and burrs removed.
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or
reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run
of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and
venting.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-43
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled
devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal
devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire
range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy,
simultaneously with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Engineer.
d. Functional test for Owner's benefit,instruction,and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full
operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and
recalibrate as required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering
the function and operation of all control and management system components on
the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This
manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the
total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for
instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems
control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor
acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained,all
temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions,
and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits.
J. Service and Guarantee:
1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from
defects in workmanship and.material for a period of 12 months from date of
t
acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all
necessary service,adjusting,and checking during the 12 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest
revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-42
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night
sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to
maintain higher setting.
2. Fan Coil Control?Cabinet Heaters:
a. Winter Occupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating
requirement for room. Fan shall be under control of three speed
manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit.
b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain lowered set
point of room. Fan shall be de-energized.
c. Summer Occupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion to add chilled water on a
rise in space demand. Fan shall be under control of three speed
manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit.
d. Summer Unoccupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion, however, no chiller
water will be available. Fan shall be de-activated. Should room
temperature exceed 80 degrees. The coil valve shall open in the
fan run.
3. Radiators and Unit Heaters
a. Each radiator and unit heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated
t control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when
temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close.
I. Adjustment and Calibration:
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate,test, and
adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors,
and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on
systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test
run,and adjusted.
2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-41
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
respond to an alarm,and return to the exact position left in the previous functional
mode.
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions
through the use of a 2-button"mouse"operator interface to monitor and control all
functions and sequences within the system.
H. Sequences of Operation:
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by
Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a
specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each
specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the
Drawings.
1. Pump Control
a. Each building shall be served by two inline pumped distribution and for
beating only.
b. Heat/Cool distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-1 and P-2 (one
spare).
C. The steam to water heat exchanger shall be controlled as follows: ''
(1) (HX-1 &HX-2)Sensors located in the water supply and water
return shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset
from outdoor temperature by modulating each steam control
valve to maintain the following schedule:
Hot Water
0 degrees= 160 degrees HCS
65 degrees= 90 degrees HCS
d. Occupied Pump Control: The temperature control system shall control
pumps in the following manner.
(1) In the occupied mode, only one (1) pump shall run unless the
t energy management system decides both pumps are necessary in
order to maintain temperature. A variable frequency drive unit
shall control pump in response to load.
e. Unoccupied Pump Control:
(1) The hot water and hot water/chilled water pumps shall remain off
(both pumps) when outside temperature is above 58 degrees.
When outside temperature falls below 58 degrees,one pump shall
cycle on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside
temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run
Project No. 99037/50 15600 14VAC-40
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
F. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the
functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for
flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a
minimum,include:
a. Complete database entry
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of
operation indicated
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicaed
G. Systems Software
1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the
following system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in
a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their
respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort
condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone.
Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided.
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system
components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of
components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being controlled
and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in
t
appropriate engineering units. at appropriate locations on the graphic
representation.
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each
module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by
the program controller as defined in the real time operating system.
3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional
mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed
while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode.
The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode,
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-39
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or
chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to
impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-
wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to
Veris Industries, Inc.Hawkeye 735.
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range
of 20%to 95%RH,Visala Mod.HMW-40U.
g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads.
Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the
application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable.
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the
loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts,
enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium
contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations.
Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.
i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10
billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or
greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million
operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be
20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays
shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10
milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an
integral part of the relays.
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model
A70HA-1 C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall
be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber
Colman with Belimo Actuators,Model AF24-S.
1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals
and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers
equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions
where required.
5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a
token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE
RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS
maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all
wiring required for the local site network.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-38
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type
and have an accuracy of+1°F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ.
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-5TF to
152°F and an accuracy of within+1°F in this temperature range.
Kele Precon Model ST-O.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of+0.25°F in
the range of 45°F to 96QF, ALC Model BA-10K-2-RSO-RLC
Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override
switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25°F in their
range of application.
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.75°F
over the range of their application.
b. Pressure Instruments
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a
4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field
' checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure,
without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within+2% of
full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-
272-2-XX-B-1-2-2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive
accuracy of+ 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated
pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design.
Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure
range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-
acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold
plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls,
Model P-74FA-5-C.
C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1%
of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the
operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts
rated for the specific electrical application.
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of
+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor.
Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without
requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have
dry contact pulse accumulation.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-37
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line
controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space
temperature until communication with theTNI is restored.
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and
commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all
application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in readlwritable non-
volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a
battery backup c.f at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary
type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature
sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-
in local override switch,with setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer
for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure
Independent VAV operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of
communication,power,and all outputs.
i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600
baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp
maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally
closed,and either dry contact or bussed.
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm
} input impedance.
C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor
input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and
an occupancy LED indicator.
4. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy
ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit
accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended
use.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-36
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and
system performance.
1. Global Network Controller-LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device
which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network
(CMnet)and the Global Network(Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which
allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any
combination of up to 100 zone controllers,rooftop unit controllers, and/or
Control Modules.
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the
various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building.
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet(2.5 Mbps), or
Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be
implemented over fiber optic,twisted pair,or coaxial cable.
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers.
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more
than 100 controllers.
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting
up to 100 controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points perLgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to
Central Site Workstations,portable computers,or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether
they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
t
2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct
Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units,
fan coil units, exhaust fans,unit ventilators,etc.
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnct through the
Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for
a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In
,,, addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for
connection of a laptop computer.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 IIVAC-35
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately
accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show
each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time
clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or
decreased increments(slow motion).
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC
Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system
components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective
devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivale temperature control system components,
such as solenoid air valve.
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from
terminal strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled
by the ATC Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in
temperature control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor
from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power
wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring
shall be defined as follows:
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt
(except for power to the temperature control panels).
b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters,and electric motors.
C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where
required.
d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air
compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from
compressor motor starters to compressor motor.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-34
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
O
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict,the most restrictive shall apply.
Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit
work not conforming to applicable codes.
C. Submittals,Documentation and Acceptance
1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be
submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials,
including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring,
routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions,
calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will
function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all
equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work.
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any
equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for
review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion
schedule.
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or
corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system
will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their
final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three(3) sets of"as-built" Drawings,
and one(1)CADD disk of these Drawings.
4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that
include:
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the
equipment for each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of
equipment.
d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to
be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result
of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of
the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow
diagrams herein required by this specification.
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-33
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid.
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware,wiring,pneumatic
tubing,computing equipment and software as defined in this specification.
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project.
All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously
been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this
project.
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application
software, system peripherals,and field hardware.
5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the
project,shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification.
6. Provide the following system hardware:
a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions
listed in 1/0 Summary Tables. ,00k
C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to
perform the functions listed in UO Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database
required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the
Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables,
graphics,reports and point summaries.
3 8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and
perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of
this specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation
shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA)
b. National Electric Code(NEC)
C. National Fire Code
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-32
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
#Owl Northampton,Massachusetts
2.26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated
Logic.
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy
management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20,and shall
be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant.
It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing
central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing
master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It
will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating
parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system
graphics,thermal graphs,all to be displayed graphically at the central site(CS)via
the existing software programs.
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by
Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices
manufactured by Barber Colman.
! '* 4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated
Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a
properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed
in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all
equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in
all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays,
valves,cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control
wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all
connected and properly integrated to the control system.
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic
power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection
shall be extended from the existing system.
f 6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature
control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall
conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical
Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have 'Lamicoid"
nameplates,isolated control valves,relays,etc.to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope of Work
1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of
Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-31
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
smaller shall have screwed ends;2-1/2"and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers
for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones,
Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each
strainer 2-1/2"and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off.
2.24 FAN COIL UNITS
A. General: Unit shall include chassis, coil, fan board, fan wheel(s), housing(s), motor, and
insulation. Chassis shall be galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with all edges
flanged. Insulation shall be faced,heavy density glass fiber.
B. Water Coils: Water coils shall be 5/8 in. O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded
to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fm collars and sleeved coil end supports.
Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psig (air), and leak test 300
psig (air under water). Maximum entering water temperature 275 degrees F. Supply and
return connections on side of units as designated on the Contract Drawings.
C. Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal, forward-curved, double width of non-corrosive, molded,
fiberglass-reinforced thermo-plastic material on all units. Fan houses of formed sheet
metal. All units shall be complete with three speed fan switch tappings for multi-speed
control from a central processor.
D. Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent
of rated voltage. Motors operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed
settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise by
winding resistance method does not exceed 50 C. (PSC motors)on high speed. All motors
factory run tested assembled in unit prior to shipping. All motors shall be complete with
motor cords,which are quickly detachable at junction box by locking prong connector.
E. Filters: Filters shall be removable from cabinet without removing front panel; filters shall
be 1"throw away type. Two extra sets of filters shall be provided for each unit.
F. Electrical Performance: All cataloged model wires in accordance with National Electric
Code and UL listed.
G. Fan coil unit shall be Trane,McQuay or International. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.25 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above
plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in plastered
ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp
type DSC-211 "Universal' (12"x 12").
Project No. 99037/50 15600 I VAC-30
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
SFA-5.8, Section U, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler
metal materials.
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B 16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-
face for steel flanges,unless otherwise indicated.
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
2.22 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with
materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service.
Select packless expansion joints to provide 200% absorption capacity of piping expansion
between anchors.
B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply
phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-
ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems.
Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper
positioning.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide expansion compensators
of one of the following:
Flexonics Div.; UOP,Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
Keflex,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Vibration Mountings and Controls,Inc.
D. Provide ;ipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as
indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision
t_
for anchoring to building substrate.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment
guides of the following:
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
2.23 STRAINERS
A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size,iron body,"Y"pattern and shall be installed on the inlet
side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-29
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4;Grade IV.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the
following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise
indicated,Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Rais-d-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B 16.9,except ANSI B 16.28 for short-
radius elbows and returns;rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type
as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney
"Weldolets" or'Threadolets",or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do
not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than
1-1/2"and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2",and do not thread nipples full length
(no close-nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88;Type as indicated for each service;hard-drawn temper
for water piping; soft temper for oil piping.
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.23.
14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
Section II,Part C,ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated,provide soldering materials as
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-28
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Hot Water/Steam Condensate Return:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
b. Runouts 1 in.and less: 1-1/2 in.
c. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in.
d. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 2 in.
2.21 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality.
Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every
length of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to
ANSI B2.1-1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1,or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping
work.
B. Application
1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and
Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded,
2-1/2"and larger welded,or Type"L"copper for hot and dual temperature water.
2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40,threaded,cast bronze fittings.
3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings,AWS class BAgl silver
solder.
4. Condensate Drain(from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast or
wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan room
equipment and connection to existing lines.
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe :ASTM A53,A106 or Al 20; except comply with ASTM A53 or
A106 where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-27
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless
otherwise noted.
F. Pipe Insulation
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall
have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not
exceeding 50,all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for
applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and
smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe
and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation
shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve
bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on
adjoining insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the
integrity of the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant,
and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe
insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by
Gustin-Bacon,Manville,or other approved equal.
7. All hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up
water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or
approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to
exceed.25 BTU in.per sq. ft.per F.per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees
F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall
be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket
laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20
adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an
aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands.
8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed
cover,thickness to be as listed below.
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required: ■
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-26
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
2.19 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Patrson, Fee &
Mason,or equal.
B. For all pipe 2-1/2"and larger-Grinnell Figure No.20,at 10'intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4"or less,
10'intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact wi''i non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or
plastic coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within l' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of
pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the
elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping;hangers to
be installed outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser clamp;
to be installed immediately below a coupling.
2.20 INSULATION
A. All air supply,return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts
shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville TypeFSK. Secure to duct with
Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with
staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct
insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts
exceed 24 in.in width.
B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handlingunits shall be insulated
in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts.
C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all
exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick,
6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach
board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All
edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard
of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy
finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet
.mow Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber
with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-25
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop
of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type
equal to Dole or Taco.
D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall
be Bell& Gossett, Cash,Taco, or Watts equal to Bell& Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve
set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 prig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow
preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe
valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of
this Section of the Specifications.
E. Furnish and install all temperature-pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems.
All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS.
2.16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend
removable tube bundle, steam in shell,water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall
include a cast iron bonnet,copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped.
B. HX-1 Hopkins House - Shall be capable of heating 30 gpm from 160° to 180° with 5-psi
steam pressure. Total heat load is 300,000 Btuh, 306 pounds per hour capacity. Velocity
shall not exceed 4 ft/sec. with a pressure drop of 1 foot of water. The shell and tube shall
be rated for 150-psi design pressure and 375 ° design temperature. Bell &Gossett Model
No. SU62-4.
C. HX-2 Wesley House - Shall be capable of heating 32 gpm from 160° to 180° with 5-psi
steam pressure. Total heat load is 303,000 Btuh, 315 pounds per hour capacity. Velocity
shall not exceed 5 ft.sec. with a pressure drop of.5 feet of water. The shell and tube shall
be rated for 150-psi design pressure and 375 °design pressure. Bell& Gossett Model No.
SU 62-4.
D. Heat exchanger shall be as manufactured by ITT Bell&Gossett or approved equal.
2.18 STEAM TRAPS
A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings.
t
B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with
horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure
thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a
removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to
permit flow in either direction.
C. Steam traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be
allowed.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-24
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and
RPM,electrical characteristics,and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control
cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following:
• (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays) with fused
disconnect and cover interlock for each motor.
• (1)Electrical alternator.
• (2)"Auto-Off Hand"selector switches.
• (1)Numbered terminal strip.
• (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage
exceeds 230 volts.
All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The
control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories,Inc.
Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical
alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle.
Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump,
should the first pump or its control fail,shall be provided by the lag float switch.
D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers shall
coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring between
the pump,control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit.
The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish
complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, installation and
operation instructions.
Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell&Gossett or approved equal.
2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working
pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting
rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided
to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions.
B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing
entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size,
with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed.
C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where
shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size,but in no case
shall they be less than 2 in.steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in.high. Drain
tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-23
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. Ashcroft-#1018, 3-1/2"dial,red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal
operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale.
2.12 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the s}stem in
which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black
malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or
0838. In copper and brass piping,they shall be 125 lb.bronze or brass with ground joint.
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints
shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with
graphite applied to both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent
galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength
of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable
for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed,
or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so
that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current,which would exist with
metal to metal contact.
2.13 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass
through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line
size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve
without gouging.
2.14 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacture's instructions a duplex condensate
units as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of(1) cast iron receiver, (2) water
pumps,(2)float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified.
The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be
equipped with (2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial
thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves
between pumps and recover,and(2)lifting eye bolts.
A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket
shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning,
requiring no additional floor space for servicing.
B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be
close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with
stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring.
Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250'F for maximum life. Each pump
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-22
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when
used as balance valves.
G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in.and larger-Tour&Anderson Series STAF,neoprene
seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig
working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 10117 or 118F, G6-HI2. Provide open
position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more
above the floor.
H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour& Anderson Series STAF,
lever operated, faced plug,neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze top
and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure,Figure 118. Provide open position stops
for all valves.
1. For 2 in. and smaller-Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson Figure STAD or STA-
t D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and
bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all
valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit
shall be furnished with drain kit.
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco,Williams&Hager,or Smolensky equal to
Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat,
150 psig ASME rated.
2.10 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor
30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass,red reading mercury, 9" scale length, ZF
subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no
case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each
thermometer shall be provided with a brass,monel, or stainless steel separable socket of
matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe.
Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and
read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water heating system: 25-240°F
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft
"Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a
pulsation damper (Ashcroft #110613) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft
#1095).
Aw B. Model number,size and range to be as follows:
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-21
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled
1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quit operation. The horse power of the
motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump
curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency.
Provide steel base.
E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.09 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the sam make except as noted below for special valves and shall be
Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following
Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts,and all balancing valves shall be Tour
and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed.
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all
bronze with iron hand wheel,rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure.
In general,all line service valves are to be gate valves,manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves- Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T.
3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309.
4. Drain Valves-Watts No.B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter,cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH.
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1. Gate: 2-1/2 in.and smaller- Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger- Stockham
Figure G-620 or G-623.
2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger-
Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger -
Stockham Figure G-931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH.
E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316,
steel disc and shaft,Nordel EPT seat,designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted
with lever operator for two position operation.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-20
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be selected
by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be tamper-
proof.
F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less
than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front shall
wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws.
Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be
through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall.
G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors.
The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at
the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any
intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed
position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper
knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting
the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc
die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the
enclosure to a 3/32 in.back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws.
H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall
be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall
be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking
device with Allen Head operator.
I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both
ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20
gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air
outlet louvers.
2.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type)
A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and
constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. t7 Pump end shall be of the in-line, single-stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump
models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the
manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at
temperatures from 5°F to 2500 (-15°C to 121°C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12
Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B16.1, 125-1b. flat face.
C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained
cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring,and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless
steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless
steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be if tungsten carbide/carbon with
other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-19
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall bebonderized and then
coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent corrosion
resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by means of
continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded type
construction will not be acceptable.
D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type.
E. The shaft shall be constructed of C 1040 ground and polished steel.
F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially
constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning
grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000
hours.
G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate
horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the
oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation.
H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the
unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan.
I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air.
2.7 CONVECTORS
A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings
for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and
shall be rated in accordance with Code CS 140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards.
B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of
round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end
supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall be
mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into headers
with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent tubes from
loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded joints or
f compression couplings shall be permitted.
C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be
constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening
fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and
painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and
convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel
stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units' 36"or longer.
D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead
level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above
finished floor.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-18
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should
not require soldering.
D. System Requirements
1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information
shall be included relating to the following:
a. tube handling
b. tube measuring
C. tube cutting
d. tube bending
e. tube repairing
f. tube connections
g. tube solvent sensitivity
h. tube UV light sensitivity
i. tube capacity and pressure drop
j. tube loop layout patterns
k. tube fastening procedures
1. manifold assembly instructions
OPW m. manifold location
n. fitting assembly instructions
o. insulation practices
p. installation method by construction type
q. control applications
r. system start-up procedures
2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in
accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products
utilized.
3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be
supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings,manifolds, and other
recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete
radiant tubing system.
2.6 UTILITY FAN
A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembledwith fan,
fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as
shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted
with the Shop Drawings.
B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The
Ask mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the
manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-17
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring
the tubing.
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual
loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic
components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the
following features:
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold
configurations and allows for future expansion.
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an
automatic integrated air vent.
C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall
have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water
temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and
set up of a radiant heating system.
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental
adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts
will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system.
e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve
and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating
system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to
the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow
complete loop isolation.
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to
indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue
to indicate cooler return water.
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means
of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system.
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4"NPT
t female,to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability.
3. Fittings
a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut,
ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to
manifold.
b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2",5/8" 3/4"
Mftfold to 1/2" copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-16
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum
Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F
3/8" 275 235
1/2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180
3/4" 210 180
j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in
the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM
F876).
k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9,
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing
material shall be within the range of 65%to 89%inclusive."
1. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (t2 = time to failure of boiled
sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t," (t, = time to failure of
unboiled sample).
m. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube
shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90
degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be
as follows:
3/8"tubing 3.0" radius
1/2"tubing 3.75" radius
5/8" tubing 4.5" radius
3/4"tubing 5.75" radius
n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than
five(5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows:
1. Nominal tubing size.
f 2. Type of plastic tubing material.
3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9.
4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure
rating is valid.
5. ASTM designation,ASTM F876.
6. Manufacturer's name and production code.
Additional Marking
1. Date of manufacturing.
2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-15
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using
the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient
temperature and pressure.
C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working
pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working
temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature.
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX
tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and
materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for
"Oxygen Permeation"as related to the following paragraphs:
e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially
uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and
outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing
walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or
other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the
wall integrity.
f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness
3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
1/2" 0.625" 0.070"
5/8" 0.750" 0.083"
3/4" 0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a
density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3.
h. Sustained Pressure:
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum
Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180°F
3/8" 250 210
1/2" 195 165
5/8" 190 165
3/4" 190 165
i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing
shall be as given.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-14
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FUAG-15 aluminum deflected blade
register,off-white finish,with opposed blade damper.
C. Top Exhaust Register(TER) - Titus Model 271FI.UAG-15 aluminum construction, double
deflection,white finish,with opposed blade damper.
D. Top Supply Registers(TSR) -Titus Model CT-980 Fixed Aluminum Bar with '/"spacing
and type-11 border.
E. Bottom Return Register (BRR) - Titus Model 1707, double reflection register with
opposed blade damper.
2.4 LOUVERS
A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the followingRuskin
Mfg.Co.model.
1. Type"A"-No.ELF375D with box frame,extended sill, 1/2"aluminum mesh bird
screen,and Kynar 500 finish.
2.5 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM
A. Scope of Work
1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system
consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution
manifolds and associated fittings.
B. References
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876,
entitled"Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing".
2. Am(:rican Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877
entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water
Distribution Systems".
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water
floor heating systems".
C. Materials
1. Tube
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance
with ASTM F876.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-13
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made
with flexible ductwork,UL listed,Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return,
M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct
straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
Q. Flexible Air Duct:
1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold,Thermoflex,Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be
equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct.
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed
into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density
fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an
inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the
latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181.
Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive
pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for
velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E.
R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan,
30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4"
long securely held to retaining clamps.
S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum.
2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any
variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested
shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the
Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room
shall be at 3/8 in.= 1 ft.0 in.scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has
been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the
-Or responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of
inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in
sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings.
2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES,AND REGISTERS
A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman,
equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's,
locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face
bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated.
Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by
the Engineer.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-12
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual
damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct
mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid
construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full
swing of the access door,two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated
ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate
doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by
12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for
access to fire damper fusible links or other devices.
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened
to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be
hung with black 1"x 1/16"strap iron bent 1"under bottom side of the duct and fastened to
the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many
more so that they are not greater than 6"centers.
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that
the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point.
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the
Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area
shown on the Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing,reinforcing,flanges,etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based
on maintaining airtight ducts at 2"WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage
of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork
shall be sealed with U.L.classified United Duct Sealer,or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and
adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or
grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the
proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the
butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with
Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper
bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet
metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be
Jr used.
O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL
label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555
continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction
with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops.
Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be
installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test
under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall
opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct
free area.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-11
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
PART 2 -MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above
hung ceilings,duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other trades
to avoid conflicts with structure,piping,conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming
quality.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or
SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed
ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance.
Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be
free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off.
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made
by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that
duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other
trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least
one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for
this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal
to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and
"Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co.
shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included.
F. Duct sections 1'-6"wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-
1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to
make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the
HVAC Contractor's option.
G. Ducts from 18"to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the
same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall
t have 1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42",the standing
bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners
not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be
jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at
not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6"
centers,sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure
seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more,
except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-
erection attachment of fittings.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-10
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1.20 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the
HVAC Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to providing all HVAC work specified and shown on the Drawings,
less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Refer to section 01230 alternates the following schedule and the contract Drawings for a
description of alternatives.
D. Schedule of Alternates
1. Wesley House
WI: Delete replacement windows.
W2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to
sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
00*- W3: Refurbish student rooms per alternate schedule.
W4: Paint exterior building trim and clapboards Color A and wood shingles
Color B.
W5: Delete new shed dormer at third floor.
W6: Change specified radiation to fm tube radiation.
W7: Delete DDC controls to student rooms and install self contained
control valve equal to Macon.
2. Hopkins House
HI: Delete basement demolition, underpinning, excavation, and new
supports and foundations under the existing building.
H2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to
sheathing and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-9
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate
protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon
completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises
all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains
on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter orsmaller,required for the
installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor.
All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting
and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports Oe. beams or
joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer.Location for openings, etc.
shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work
with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-
ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4"in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. Aow
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves cr inserts required before the new walls
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all
drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change
order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers,
volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve
numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition ,
to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-8
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps,fans,etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional
requirements.
1.16 PROTECTION
A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other
Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage
thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected,tested,
and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material
and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of
work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or
foreign material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting,
setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each
Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling
and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the
equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure
to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor.
D. ]f Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather,
vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or
absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.
1.17 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts and equipment of all
foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all
piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of
cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-7
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade.
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for
a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed,fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified
personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's
representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of
the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL,the name and location of the equipment or the building, the
name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of
Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard
binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
f
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-6
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as
called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate
the structural and fmish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing
Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the
work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and
placement of all equipment and materials.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to
avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and
equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to
areas designated by the College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be
made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for
the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Subcontract shall be provided by the 14VAC Contractor.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,
t 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines
and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags,packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed
by the HVAC Contractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,
closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,unless specifically noted otherwise
+, on the Drawings.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-5
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details,dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished on the project.
In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's
HVAC Department for review and approval.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any
and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
HVAC Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. t The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water
or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable
work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract
requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
Project No. 99037/50 15600 14VAC-4
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least anount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes,conduit,and cable runs
shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items.
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury
at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with theDrawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work
since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in
regard thereto.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No
substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and
condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves,
Grundfos pumps,Tour and Anderson balancing valves,Tunstall steam traps.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance
with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full
weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly
in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-3
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
12. Instructions.
13. Record Drawings.
14. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and
ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All
piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to
such places designated by the College.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations,
the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his
work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising
as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on
both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The 14VAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information
as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-2
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of
Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Snecifications for requirements,which affect work under
this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated
on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following;
1. Steam to water heat exchanger.
2. Unit heaters and radiators.
3. Pex tubing system and manifold.
4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including
pumps,heat exchanger valves,and specialties.
5. Duct systems for and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and
terminal boxes.
6. Exhaust fans.
t
7. Insulation for piping,ductwork,and equipment.
8. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control
work shall be by Yankee Technology,Inc.
9. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
10. Air and water balance,tests,start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall
be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the
College."
11. Guarantee.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid.
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill
lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride
as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and
hydrants while system is being chlorinated.
C. After twenty-four(24)hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present,
flush out system until all traces are removed.
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue
flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of
water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected
hose.
E. Submit test results to Owner.
.00k
3.11 GAS SERVICE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the gas company
for a new gas service in Wesley House.
B. The gas company shall furnish and install the service to the building.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall start his work from the outlet of the meter or regulator
provided by the gas company and connect to all equipment requiring gas as shown on
the Plans.
3.12 WATER SERVICE
f
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to have a new water
meter installed by the Northampton Water Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall
order the new meter, and the College shall be billed direct for all charges.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-20
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the
General Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the
General Contractor.
3.5 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged
in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before
masonry proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and
sealed.
3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping
passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or
Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing
through same. Center pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls.
3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the
Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be
tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed
and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by
the Plumbing Code.
3.8 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job,
thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers,
rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in
perfect condition and ready for use.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-19
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of
straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have
American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards
Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite
compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for
pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing
throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill.
B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance
with the directions of the manufacturer.
C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At
minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of
dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each
joint as it is completed.
D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard
manufactured PVC adapters and fittings.
E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated
with unbroken continuity of invert.
3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to
weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel
with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service
lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as
may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and
4ittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit
not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for
expansion and contraction of pipe.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the
Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at
such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-18
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Furnish and install thermal expansion absorber, as manufactured by Amtrol Model
AST-180, with 36 gallon acceptance volume, 77 gallon tank volume, ASME tank pre-
charge tank with butyl-diaphragm liner,FOA approved.
D. Indirect Steam-Fired Storage Water Heaters: Furnish and install four (4) Viessmann
Horicell-HG 450-120 gallon indirect fired storage water heaters. All four(4)units shall
be arranged in a 2x2 stacked configuration. Each heater shall have a steam heat
exchange capable of delivering 125 gph at 100° F. temperature difference.
E. Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible to provide an angle iron support frame to
support all four (4) heaters (4 in. by 4 in. by 3/8 in. angle iron) min. of 36 in. high.
Actual height to be coordinated with Heating Contractor to allow proper installation of
steam traps.
2.15 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains,piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed
by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing
Contractor shall
be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to
such places as designated by the Owner.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 SOIL, WASTE,DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall
have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot
for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from
two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting
of fixtures is noted.
f
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with
reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of
45° wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a
combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and
1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is
from horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the
inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-17
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Contractor complete with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet with spray and Aqua Pure
Model No. AP-DWS 1000 water filter
K. Single Bowl Sink(P-6A)- Same as P-6 above.
M. Washing Machine Connection(P-7)
1. Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with '/2" supplies
and 2"drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate.
N. Wall Hydrant(P-8)
1. Woodford Model B65 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti-
siphon vacuum breaker, 3/" hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to
control both flow and drain functions, loose tee key to be furnished with each
hydrant. No substitutions shall be made.
O. Hose Bibb(P-9)
1. Woodford Model No. 24P,with vacuum breaker and loose key.
P. Floor Drain(P-10)
1. Wade Model No. 1100 w/FC7 Strainer.
Q. Floor Drain(P-l0A)
1. Mechanical room floor drains to be Zum 415 with type`B" strainer.
R. Laundry Tub(P-11)
1. Basin- Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit.
2. Faucet-Chicago Model 895-317, 8"center with E-12 aerator.
3
3. Trim- Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece.
2.14 WATER HEATER SYSTEM(Haven House)
A. Existing gas-fired water heater with storage tank, based on AO Smith, consisting of one
(1) Burkay Model No. 420 water generators, shall remain and be re-piped to new
Viessman Tanks.
B. Furnish and install circulation pump to deliver 45 GPM min. at 20 ft. head, with '/ HP,
208 volt motor,Taco pump and relocate flow switch.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-16
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
with flow, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and
risers.
3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece
offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro
Handi Lav-Guard"molded vinyl insulation.
H. Bath Tub/Shower(P-3)
1. Tub basin — American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or
2393.202,recessed bath,white non-slip.
2. Control Valve — Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. S-
96-600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral
diverter and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn.
Consisting of tub spout and Clear-Flo shower head with arm and flange,
wall/hand shower with flexible metal hose and 30" slide bar.
3. Fittings—Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow.
I. Shower Stall&Drying Stall
1. Shower Stall — Aquarius Model No. B3672SPF double compartment shower
receptor with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor.
Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons" No. 9645
complete with `/" thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This
Contractor shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all piping.
Note: This contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of
construction and shall be responsible for all, or any, damage to showers.
2. Shower Valve — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X,
pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to
limit handle turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super shower head with Nu-Arm
head bracket No. 4-131-M-301.
J. Mop Receptor(P-5)
1. Basin- Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop basin.
2. Faucet — Chicago Faucet Model 540-LD-897S-WXF, 8" centers, with
vacuum breaker spout, 369 handles, WXF non-adjustable inlet centers,
polished chrome plate only, ADA compliant.
3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and
bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer.
L. Double Bowl Sink(P-6)- Sink to be furnished by others and installed by this
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-15
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Seat- Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front
seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge.
4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal
D. Water Closet(P-1 A)Handicapped
1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" 17"H Model 3043.102, elongated
vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 V"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO-ADA with 1" angle stop, vacuum break-
er,wall and spud flanges.
3. Seat- Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front
seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge.
E. Water Closet(P-1B)
1. Closet — American Standard "Neolo" Model 2529.016, wall outlet elongated
vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall
and spud flanges.
3. Seat- Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front
seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge.
F. Lavatory(P-2)
1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings.
2. Faucet — American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with
lever handles.
Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and .
risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome plated trap with cleanout
plug.
G. Lavatory(P-2A) Handicapped
1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings.
2. Supply Fitting - S-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-
closing with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-14
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.10 WATER METER
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a 1 '/2 " Rockwell "Census" water
meter in accordance with the City of Northampton Water Department requirements.
2.11 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No
substitutions will be allowed.
2.12 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or
cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be
furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling
finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12"
min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall
ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x
12" min.)with screw driver type lock.
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division,
Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal.
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to
establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with
the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall
be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures
and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the
wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished,
bright surfaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper
installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the .
building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and
proper support of all plumbing fixtures.
C. Water Closet(P-1)
1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous
china, siphon jet action with 1 V"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker, wall
and spud flanges.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response,but in
no case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed.
Each thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable
socket of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated
pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily
seen and read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water: 30°F- 180°F.
C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range
shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co.,or approved equal.
B. Provide at water entrance,on both sides of pressure reducing valve.
2.8 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP
A. New recirculation pumps shall be Taco Model 007 Cartridge circulator pump, with
aquastat operation to deliver 5 gpm at 10'-0" head, 1/25 H.P.
B. This Contractor shall furnish and install pump aquastat for pump. Wiring of pump and
aquastat shall be by the Electrical Contractor.
C. Circulating pump shall be Taco Cartridge circulators. No substitutions will be allowed.
One pump to be installed in Wesley House, one pump to service Hopkins House and
two pumps to service Haven House.
2.9 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. Furnish and install in Haven House one Leonard Valve Co.'s Model TM 186-8015-
30TA-PRV-RF-0 Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, inlet checkstops, outlet
volume/shut-off valve, dial thermometer (range: 0 to 140 degrees F.), rough bronze
finish, complete with unions and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion
resistant thermostat element.
B. Unit shall be factory assembled, tested, and shall consist of a 1 %"main valve and a '/"
min. flow valve. Unit is sized for 97 gpm. At a 101b. P.D.
C. No substitutions will be allowed.
D. See Drawings for size and model number for each building. ,
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve
foot(12') intervals for threaded piping.
C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6) intervals for
copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10) intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger.
Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be in-
stalled outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot (8)
intervals.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1') of each horizontal elbow.
Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be supported on hangers
placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn
ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze
recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for
carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade.
2.5 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-
sealing lap, V thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water.
Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished
floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints
taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to
form a vapor barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
f
D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run
continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with
Truebro "Handi Lav-Guard", or equal,molded insulation kit.
2.6 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor,Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice
80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2°F
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
gland assembly, Hammond Figure 1R1138, Stockman,or equal.
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125.
Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc,
copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable
handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1R1138,or equal.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or
equal.
E. Balancing Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with
calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential
pressure meter.
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson.
F. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings.
Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be
ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309.
2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body
and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type
disc, Stockham Figure G-931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer,
or equal.
G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A- 3/4".
H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or IB-440.
1. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator
Co., Model U5B-GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall be allowed.
2. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge
Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs.
2.3 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee & l,,,,
Mason, or equal.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron
"no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as
manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and
vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas
and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service
weight with push-on rubber rings.
B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with
solder fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller
shall be type "M" copper.
D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L"
seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead
free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of
ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be
chrome plated.
E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 threaded black steel pipe with fittings. All pipes
2-1/2" and larger shall be Schedule 40 pipe with threaded or welded joints.
2.2 BALL VALVES
A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series
B6001. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel
ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-
off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe
insulation thickness.
B. brain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with
attached cap and chain.
C. Provide gas cocks for sizes V and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas
piping 1-1/4" and larger with tee handles.
D. Gate Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class
125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi
wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.18 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of
the Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the
Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Refer to section 01230 alternates, and the following schedule, and all contract
Drawings. for a description of alternatives.
D. Schedule of Alternates
1. Wesley House
WI: Delete replacement windows.
W2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
W3: Refurbish student rooms per alternate schedule.
W4: Paint exterior building trim and clapboards Color A and wood shingles
Color B.
W5: Delete new shed dormer at third floor.
W6: Change specified radiation to fin tube radiation.
W7: Delete DDC controls to student rooms and install self contained control
valve equal to Macon.
2. Hopkins House
J
HI: Delete basement demolition, underpinning, excavation, and new .
supports and foundations under the existing building.
H2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-8
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver
two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words,
"Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the
building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall
have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions
shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals
shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well
as the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. the Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all .
parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
this period.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by
defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment
caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance
shall be considered as being defective.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.13 PROTECTION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good
without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the
proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for
the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time
to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural
supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect.
Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due
to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the
Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own
expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new
walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes
where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing
Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by
the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab
is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
Manner.
1.15 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage
rooms,closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are
indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from
freezing.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-6
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in
the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for
or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories
as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials
and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be
co-ordianted with the Smith College Physical Plant Department The Plumbing
Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment,
and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these
materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall
be the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his
work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur
shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted
by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
a� removed by the Plumbing Contractor.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-5
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be
U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and
designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,
and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment.
Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to
the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop
Drawings, giving all details, dimensions,capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance
with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review,
making any and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing
Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the
Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings
shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with
the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of
the work.
B. 5The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Section 01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-4
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining
to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring
such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames,
beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may
build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give
proper information as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due
to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends,
offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for
the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications
before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be
called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will .
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear
in the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in
accordance with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-3
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
8. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring
water, gas,drain, and waste connections.
9. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and
equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping,
fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush
valves, mixing valves, water heaters and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls)
to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such
places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material
after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in
conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section.
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall
govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also
exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious
laying out of his work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the
Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if
the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall
mot be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after
construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to
the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting
from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of
dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing
Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such
liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose
decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in
question.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
"'' SECTION 15400-PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts
of Division 1, as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work
under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials,plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or
indicated on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Water service entrance with meter connecting to water supply line on site for
Wesley House.
2. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage
systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals,
cleanouts, fixtures,drains, supports, and roof terminals.
3. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the
building or on site. Provide valve, boxes, fittings and all required components
for a complete installation.
4. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings,
insulation, supports,valves, water heater, and pump.
�5. Plumbing fixtures and supports.
6. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
7. Gas piping system connecting each and every fixture, device, and item of
equipment requiring gas within the building. The system shall be installed with
all incidentals necessary for a complete operational system and shall include all
piping, valves, stops, drips, meters, pressure reducing valves, vents to
atmosphere, gauges, structural supports (hangers), and such other standard
specified accessories as are necessary for a complete approved system.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-1
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
diagram. Test valve for proper operation.
3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there
purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer
from NFPA's suggested styles.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls
and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over
the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective.
t
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-25
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
written instructions for rigid systems.
F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved
transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division
15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods".
H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with
shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide
gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve
arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal
and where they will not be subject to freezing.
J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B 1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads.
Join pipe, fittings,and valves as follows.
K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.
Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to
appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.
L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible
with the couplings.
M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having
jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of
water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control
valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the
system controlled by each valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow
including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection.
Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-24
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Safmg Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the
required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galva•uzed steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids.
Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
AMW
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
sealing compound.
3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire
walls,ceilings,floors,etc.
3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction,branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical
couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-23
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
switches, air maintenance compressor, and supervisory panel, Model
M2011-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in
connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping instal-
lation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler
system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in
ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris
has not clogged sprinklers.
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at
not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum
static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure
hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe
hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50
psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve
clappers open during test,to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with
ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate
compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary
repair methods.
3.2 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the
work including,but not limited to the following:
*1. Fire safmg at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations .
through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers.
2. Fire safmg at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and
machine rooms.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-22
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, V NPT,
165°F.
h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed
type with white cover,extended dry pendent, V NPT, 165°F.
i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company,
Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control
valves for the sprinkler system.
j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection
specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co.,
Inc.,Viking Corporation, or equal.
k. Dry Pipe alarm valve shall be equal to Viking "Model E" system
complete with alarm valve, solenoid valve, 1/2 H.P. air compressor,
and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance
compressor mounted on riser.
1. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall
mounted cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with chains,
all with rough chrome-plated finish and lettering on escutcheon
reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter-Roemer. Hose
connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department
standards.
m. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig.
5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal
position only.
n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping
for automatic ball drip, size as required.
o. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to
be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP
approved for backflow prevention, Watts Model 709DDC. Provide test
kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits.
p. Swing check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping
for automatic ball drip size as required.
q. Gamewell dry pipe kit shall include all necessary equipment as shown
in Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for dry pipe
watchman's kit, Model No. M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-21
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
composition disc and bronze seat ring,bolted cover, flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940
Walworth: 8883-LT
4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,
including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping.
Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be
provided when necessary.
5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in
no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless
unavoidable.
F. Fire Protection Specialties
1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following
listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment
connections.
a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard
upright sprinkler head,rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as re-
quired by the insurance underwriter.
b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M"
chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at
165°F unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces.
C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to
Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of
heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head
wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area.
d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in
areas specified on drawings.
e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with
sight glass, and test orifice.
f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with
white finish, temperature 165°F unless noted otherwise
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-20
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
OOK Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
exceeded.
10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on
attachments.
E. Valves
1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated;
provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube,
and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection
is Installer's option.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream
pipe size.
b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than
quarter-tum.
2. Gate Valves
a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body,
solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904
b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body
bronze mounted, solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR 1154
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
3. Check Valves
a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-19
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one
of the following:
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson,Inc.
Corner&Lada Co.,Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee&Mason Mfg.Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp.
5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper
piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length
indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support
is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers,expansion joints,and at changes in direction of piping.
6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly
from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of
parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying
with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by
trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate
supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to
support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems
and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops,expansion bends and similar units.
9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-18
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,
partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on
exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers
penetration hole,and is flush with adjoining surface.
D. Supports,Anchors, and Seals
J. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS
SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping
service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size.
a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than
4".
b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less.
C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.
2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58,
of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal
piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one
manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to
suit hanger rods.
a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58,of
one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate
conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-17
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural
section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to
isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section
with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove
burrs.
b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation
walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and
pipe.
C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through
walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through
structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as
reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free
movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but
not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve
equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves
1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to
drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of con-
crete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to
prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with
oakum,caulk with lead,on both sides.
2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely
fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is
insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe
sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome
finish for occupied areas;prime paint fmish for unoccupied areas.
a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel
escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of
one of the following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-16
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and
couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by
use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections,within 1/16" misalign-
ment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched
to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel
with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated,run piping in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and
permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied
spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti-
tions,except as indicated.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator
Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures
unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical
spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by
the Architect prior to installation.
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.l; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
compounder pipe joint tape(Teflon)where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer,
on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making
grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and
prepare for application of specified coatings(if any).
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-15
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College ^'"^
Northampton,Massachusetts
(7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved
mechanical couplings.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel
bolt hole alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(9) Grooves: Conform to the following:
Standard Steel: Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
(10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide grooved piping products of the following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of
NFPA 13 and shall be as follows:
1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas),
shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working
water pressure.
2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical
Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protec-
tion Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or
standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings.
3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black
steel pipe with screwed fittings.
4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175
psi.working water pressure.
5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings,
where noted on the drawings.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-14
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B 16.4, or flanged, ANSI
B16.1.
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove
type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only.
(1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
(2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall
thickness for 6".
(3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-
groove or mechanical locking type.
d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger)
(1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A
47.
(2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
(3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type,
which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an
elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast
in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts
and bolts. Pernmit degree of contraction and expansion as speci-
fied in manufacturer's latest published literature.
(4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure
responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's
tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as
designated by ASTM D 2000.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183,
minimum tensile 110,000-psi.
(6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for
rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing
elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around
hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together
during assembly with nuts and bolts.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters
and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for
fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices.
a. Provide 1-1/8" sq.brass tags with black lettering.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded
type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment
of tags to valves,and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced
on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system,
system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or
space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which
are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses,by special
"flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish
extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with
screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames
of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet
glass.
e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated
or,if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect.
f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the
valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all
valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed
under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where
directed. Furnish two(2)extra copies of the chart to the Architect.
g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white
t lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve.
Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed
valves, approximately 12"below finished ceiling.
2.2 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A
53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-12
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
H2: Remove existing slate, flashing, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
PART 2 -MATERIALS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,pressure
ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide
proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections;provide fittings of
materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where
more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B. Basic Identification
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification
materials of one of the following:
Allen Systems,Inc.
Brady(W. H.)Co., ;Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co.,Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded
pipe markers,complying with ANSI Al3.1.
a. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers,
extending 360°around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which
best describes piping system in each instance,as selected by Architect.
C. Locate pipe markers as follows:
(1) Near each valve and control device.
(2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each
piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of
piping and equipment.
(3) Branch piping need not be marked.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-11
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings
showing foundations, floor plans,roof plans, and details.
7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the
architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the
Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this
Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.18 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of
the Fire Protection Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the
Drawings,less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Refer to section 01230 alternates, and the following schedule, and all contract
Drawings. for a description of alternatives.
D. Schedule of Alternates
1. Wesley House
WE Delete replacement windows.
W2: Remove existing slate,flashing,and wood shingle roofmg to sheathing
and replace with new slate and copper flashing.
W3: Refurbish student rooms per alternate schedule.
W4: Paint exterior building trim and clapboards Color A and wood shingles
Color B.
W5: Delete new shed dormer at third floor.
W6: Change specified radiation to fm tube radiation.
W7: Delete DDC controls to student rooms and install self contained control
valve equal to Macon.
2. Hopkins House
H 1: Delete basement demolition, underpinning, excavation, and new
supports and foundations under the existing building.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-10
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by
change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of
concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes
must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the
change.
C. Co-ordination of Trades
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the
Subcontractors of other trades, and shall finnish any information necessary to
permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible
interference or delay.
2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this
Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than
1/4"= V-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the
work of other trades.
3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible
problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation
of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own ex-
pense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed
should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical
equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes
installed by other trades.
4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment
in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes,
etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision
f
before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed.
5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required
to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of
conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor
must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this
Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may
be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be
done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not
interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-9
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words,
"Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the
building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall
have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions
shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals
shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up,operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well
as the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work
in all parts for a period of one(1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree
to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective
during this period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused
by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment
caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance
shall be considered as being defective.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as
called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall
arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and
accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and
obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to
drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs,
sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new
acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and
below the ceiling.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
OOW Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-7
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for
compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the
Architect for review,making any and all changes,which may be required.
3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire
Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility
for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor.
4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for
which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not
in accordance with the Specifications,the Fire Protection Subcontrac for will
be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his
own expense and as directed by the Architect.
5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which
indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and
also that system is operational,complete,and has no defects.
1.9 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS ,
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for
his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and
charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all
responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate
to his part of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of
his work.
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. 4 The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior
details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents
are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and
any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the
Contract requirements.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-6
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
accuracy thereof Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or
deck.
G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be
installed concealed in finished spaces.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his
work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such
doss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work
shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall
be protected by suitable means.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials
installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and
Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the
•. attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.7 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be
U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and
designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,
and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment.
Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. f Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets,
giving all details,dimensions,capacities,etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and
fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations,
elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections.
Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment.
ow 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's
insurer's rating organization (IRl Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-5
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall
govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,rules or regulations,
the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement
Officials'instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with
said officials prior to commencing work.
1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced
workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He
shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and
expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to
the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly
as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or
Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the
Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage
done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work
resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in
case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire
Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection
Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by
the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract
for the work in question.
D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other
trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information
pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other
trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish
all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the
General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire
Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to
bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends,
offsets, etc.
F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the '
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-4
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
0"K Northampton,Massachusetts
ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork,
HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head
locations shall be subject to Architect's approval.
The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic cal-
culations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed
and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI)
Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with
NFPA 13 recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping
systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years.
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSUNFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System".
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide".
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations
pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to
commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating
organization and local Fire Department.
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear
in the product specification.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests
secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be
conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-3
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
by or interfering with new construction.
8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI
Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO
Box 5010,Hartford Ct. (Attn: Mr. David M.Goush) for review and approval.
9. This Contractor shall work with the House Moving Contractor for Wesley
House, to disconnect, cap and secure all existing piping prior to moving the
house.
B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include
the following:
1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back
to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and
as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
2. Cutting and patching.
C. All systems and equipment furnished under this section which employ computers,
micro-processors, or chips shall be "Year 2000 compliant" i.e., the changing of the
calendar time from 1999-2000 shall not result in any malfunction or degradation of the
system's or equipment's function. Manufacture's written certification of compliance
shall be included with the system or equipment shop drawing submittal. '°
1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this
information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes
in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted
as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based
on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before
beginning fabrication and installation.
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is
provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and
shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-
ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be
based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.).
Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire
Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per
NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance
Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-2
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 15300-FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of
Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
under this,Section whether or n ;t,such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably
incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein
and/or indicated on the drawings,including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the
existing building of the Hopkins House and the installation of a new service
line into Wesley House.
2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in al
spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building
sprinkler system.
3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required
for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the
project.
4. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP
IF requirements.
5. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited
to, line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full
indicating,control, drain trim,and air compressor.
6. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all
spaces, unless otherwise noted, with Fire Department connection and system
test and drain connections.
7. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch
(6 mm) from face of jamb. Length equal to 18 inches greater than head to sill dimension
of opening in which each shade is installed.
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade.
E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two screws per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive
to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate;
and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of
glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
END 01, SECTION 12494
Project No. 99037/50 12494 ROLI-ER SHADES-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware
throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. C-More Shades, 7 Jewell Street, Garfield NJ.
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Legacy Champagne Shades
a. Color: Dura Shield - Beige
b. Pattern: Opaque, free of pin holes, bleeding or cracking
B. Rollers: 15/16 inch diameter wood, baked enamel finished ends with spring loaded operation.
C. Mounting Brackets: Nickel plated stamped steel.
D. Bottom Slat: 7/8 inch seasoned straight pine within 1/8 inch of hem pocket with stainless steel
eyelet, 1001b. nylon cord and manufacturers standard thimble.
E. Shade Operation: Manual;with spring roller.
2.3 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the
roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.
B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C):
Project No. 99037/50 12494 ROLLER SHADES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12494- ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roller shades.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, and finishes.
B. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type of
roller shade indicated.
2. For the following products:
a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (80 mm) square, with specified treatments
applied. Mark face of material.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SourceLimitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Project No. 99037/50 12494 ROLLER SHADES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24
inches (600 mm) o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate
smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 12356
t
Project No. 99037/50 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Wall-Hung Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end
panels and to top and bottom rails.
I. Base Unit Back Panels: 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick plywood fastened to rear edge of end panels
and to top and bottom rails.
J. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 3/4-by-1-1/4-inch (19-by-32-mm) solid wood mortised and fastened
into face frame.
K. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior
of body.
1. join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners or with glued dovetail joints.
2. join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.
3. Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-) thick solid wood.
4. subfronts, Backs, and Sides: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick solid wood or 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)
thick plywood.
5. Bottoms: 3/16-inch-(4.8-mm-) thick plywood.
L. Shelves: 3/4-inch-(19-mm-) thick particleboard or 3/4-inch-(16-mm-) thick plywood.
M. joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners.
Connect tops and bottoms of wall cabinets and bottoms and stretchers of base cabinets to ends
and dividers with mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.
N. Factory Finishing: To greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final
touchup until after installation.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims.
Where°casework al uts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips,
scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete
installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4
III).
D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24
inches (600 null) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
Project No. 99037/50 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects and kiln
dried to 7 percent moisture content. Stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces.
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with Grade C faces stained to
be compatible with exposed surfaces and Grade 3 backs of same species as faces.
C. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting
strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood [timber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent
moisture content, respectively.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
2.4 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, material, size,
and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices.
B. Hinges: Concealed European-style hinges or knife hinges with integral catch.
C. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound
when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with
BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
D. Pulls: Hafele 116.13.675; Nickel plated steel wire pull with black rings.
2.5 CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. Face Style: Reveal overlay; door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet body or face frames.
B. Face Frames: 3/4-by-1.5/8-inch (19-by-41-mm) solid wood with glued mortise and tenon or
doweled joints.
C. Door and Drawer Fronts: 5/8-inch- (15-mm-) thick particleboard with plastic-laminate faces,
backs, and edges, except provide continuous solid-wood pulls on one edge. Provide same grade,
pattert) color, and texture of plastic laminate for backs and edges as for faces.
D. Exposed Cabinet Ends: Veneer-faced plywood.
E. Cabinet Ends: 3/8-inch-(9.5-mm-) thick plywood.
F. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms: 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick plywood, fully supported by and secured in
rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back rail.
G, Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: 3/4-by-1-3/4-inch (19-1)y45-nun) solid wood, interlocking with end
panels and rabbeted to receive top and Bottom panels. Back rails secured under pressure with
glue and with mechanical fasteners.
Project No. 99037/50 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of
kitchen casework.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cabinets: Omega Cabinets, Ltd.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Dynasty
C. Styles:
1. Hopkins House: Sheffield, cherry; stain as selected by Architect.
2. Wesley House: Clayton, maple; stain as selected by Architect.
2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES,AND PATTERNS
A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Rill range for these
characteristics.
2.3 CABINET MATERIALS
A. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following:
1. Exposed Wood Species: As follows. Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that are
noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings.
a. Hard maple.
4). Cherry.
2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for
compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with face veneer of species
indicated, selected for compatible color and grain with Grade A faces and Grade C backs
of same species as faces.
A. Edge band exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, solid-wood edging
of same species as Lace Veneer.
B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
Project No. 99037/50 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
. Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material exposed
to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following materials; in sets showing the full range of color,
texture, and pattern variations expected:
1. Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each
species.
2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm), for each species.
3. One unit of each type of exposed hardware.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of casework by
referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of
similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with „^
the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions."
C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards:
1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.
a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal
affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the
above standard.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Enviroymental Limitations: Do not deliver or install kitchen casework until building is enclosed,
wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction,
establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for
trimming and fitting.
C. Field Measurements: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify
dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes if necessary.
Project No. 99037/50 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12356-KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood-faced kitchen cabinets.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including
visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.
B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including
interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as
"semiexposed."
C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers,
web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and
completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are
defined as"concealed."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Cabinets.
2. Cabinet hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and
attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash
profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining countertops.
AOW-
Project No. 99037/50 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
END OF SECTION 10801
f
Project No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Frameless, Stainless-Steel Mirror: Minimum nominal 0.0312-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, Type
430 stainless steel with bright finish and 1/4-inch (6-mm) return at edges; bonded to 1/4-
inch- (6-mm-) thick, tempered hardboard backing and secured with tamper-resistant,
stainless-steel fasteners.
G. Shower Curtain Rod: Where this designation is indicated, provide heavy duty stainless-steel
shower curtain rod with 3-inch (75-mm) stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners, in
length required for shower opening indicated, and complying with the following:
1. Products: Bobrick; B-6047
2. Heavy-Duty Rod: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-)
thick stainless steel.
H. Shower Curtain: Provide shower curtain complying with the following:
1. Antibacterial Shower Curtain: Minimum 10-oz. (284-g), nylon-reinforced vinyl or 0.008-
inch- (0.2-mm-) thick vinyl material with integral antibacterial agent and corrosion-resistant
grommets at minimum 6 inches (152 mm) o.c. through top hem.
a. Size: Minimum 12 inches (300 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches (1828 mm)
high.
b. Color: White.
2. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with
snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain
grommet.
I. Soap Dish: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless-steel soap dish complying with
the following:
1. Products: Bobrick; B-973 vandal-resistant, polished chrome on cast bronze.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with rectangular wall bracket and backplate for concealed
mounting.
J. Robe Hook: Provide robe hook complying with the following:
1. Products: H.B. Ives, No. 582, MB26D finish.
2. Double-Prong Unit: Stainless-steel, double-prong robe hook for surface mounting.
K. Mop and Broom: Where indicated, provide mop and broom holder complying with the
following:
1. Products: Bobrick; B-224
2. Mop and Broom Holder: 30-inch- (750-inm-) long unit fabricated of minimum nominal
18ga. (L2-nun-) thick, stainless-steel hat channel with three spring-loaded, rubber, cam-type,
mop/broom holders with shelf and rag hooks
L. Shower Doors: Where indicated, provide shower doors complying with the following:
1. Products: Triton, model 964S pivot door-ii-panel ...%�
Project No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
'" C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Paper Towel Dispenser: Install unit provided by Owner.
1. Surface-Mounted Type: Sized for minimum of 300 C-fold or 400 multifold paper towels
without using special adapters; with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with
refill indicators that are pierced slots at sides or front.
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide toilet tissue dispenser
complying with the following:
1. Products: Bobrick&76867
2. Type: Double-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage except Partition mounted serving
two adjacent toilet compartments.
4. Material: Stainless steel.
5. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with mfr's standard spindle.
6. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2-or 5-inch-(114-or 127-mm-) diameter-core tissue rolls
C. Soap Dispenser: Install soap dispenser provided by Owner.
1. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Horizontal-Tank Type: Surface-mounted type, minimum 40-oz.
(1182.9-mL) capacity tank with stainless-steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to
dispense soap in measured quantity by pump action; and stainless-steel cover with
unbreakable window-type refill indicator.
D. Grab Bar (Towel Bars): Provide stainless-steel grab bar complying with the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch(1.3 mm).
2. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
3. dripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches(32 mm) for mediumdury applications.
E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Where indicated, provide vinyl sanitary napkin disposal unit
complying with the following:
1. Products: Rubbermaid
2. Surface-Mounted Type: With seamless exposed walls; self-closing top cover; and
removable, reusable receptacle.
F. Mirror Unit: Where indiaited, provide mirror unit complying with the following:
Project No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge
protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-
resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and full mirror
size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler
material.
D. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide minor-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-
resistant installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to
hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.
E. Key Operation: Provide accessories which DO NOT require key operation for servicing and
resupplying.
F. SHOWER DOORS
1. Chromium/Silver finished frame with stainless steel fasteners and reversible door .
a. Door: Full length pull with full length magnetic catch and continuous hinge with
stainless steel pin.
b. Glass: '�/4" Laminated White Glass
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts,
or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
written instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab hars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N), when tested according
to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary lahels and protective coatincys.
Project No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES,4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
3. Shower Doors:
a. Universal Rundle, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory
Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm)
minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges;ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm)
minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied
finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel
plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering,
electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
f
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer
logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface
not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or
stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams
and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-
steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
Project No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, `
capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath
Accessory Schedule.
1. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged solely
by Architect, may be provided.
2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing
of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period
indicated.
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the
following:
1. Robe Hooks:
a. H.B. Ives, Co.
2. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A& J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Project No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
how Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
2. Shower Doors
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Mirrored Glass" for frameless mirrors.
2. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,
profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of
accessory specified.
B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
1. Approved fall-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
t
D. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and
room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Projccr No. 99037/50 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination ,
rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that
comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments
indicated to be handicapped accessible.
4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors
at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm)between panels and walls. Secure units in
position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top
and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or
tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb,
and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang
doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed
position.
C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting construction and
level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so doors are level and aligned with panels when
doors are in closed position.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
t
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately
30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing
doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
FND OF SECTION 10155 ,
Project No. 99037/50 10 15 5 TOILET COMPARTMENTS -4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and
screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
G. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
H. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
I. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip in manufacturer's
standard finish.
J. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide
sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or
other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment
system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Compartments and Screens: Provide aluminum heat-sink strips at
exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning.
C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor
conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster.
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum
32-inch-(813-mm-)wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open
at any angle up to 90 degrees.
1 Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to
be handicapped accessible.
Project No. 99037/50 10 15 5 TOILET COMPARTMENTS -3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to
ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Partition Systems, Inc.; Columbia Partitions.
2. Santana Products, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Solid-Plastic, Phenolic Core: Solid phenolic core with melamine facing on both sides, fused to
substrate without visible glue line or seam. Provide units with eased edges and with minimum
3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels and
screens. Provide melamine color as follows:
1. Colors: Two colors in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
C. Solid-Plastic, Polymer Resin: High-density polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous color
throughout. Provide material not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick with seamless construction and
eased edges in color and pattern as follows:
1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
2. Colors and Patterns: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than
0.0311 inch (0.8 mm)thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
L For solid-plastic, polymer-resin pilasters, in lieu of stainless-steel pilaster shoes and sleeves,
manufacturer's standard plastic pilaster shoes and sleeves may be provided.
1 . Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or I J-brackets for attaching panels and screens to
walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
3. Material: Chrome-plated brass.
Project No. 99037/50 10 15 5 TOILET COMPARTMENTS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10155-TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Solid-plastic, phenolic core.
2. Type: Solid-plastic,polymer resin.
3. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
4. Compartment Style: Floor anchored.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves,
and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details
of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors,
hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showily the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or
screen indicated.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field
Project No. 99037/50 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS - 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, and defects.
1. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Scribe and fit panels full height. Apply wall adhesive and lap joints minimum of 2 inches. Roll
panels for even distribution of adhesive.
C. Install panels vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches
(75 mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams.
D. Apply trim edges around outside corners with tight closure at seams and edges.
E. Clean and prime all surfaces with silicone primer. Apply sealant to all seams, joints, plumbing
trim and accessories. Where panels terminate against surfaces to receive paint finish, apply bead
of latex sealant.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C. Remove all excess and waste materials. Dispose of properly.
END OF SECTION 09950
Project No. 99037/50 09952 PVC WAIL COVERINGS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160
lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Universal Bath Systems.
2.2 PANELS
A. High Molecular PVC. lwft�'
1. Thickness: 0.090
2. Color: Bone
3. Trim: Shapes and styles to provide watertight enclosure
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. General: Watertight, mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with substrate application,
as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Seala4. Mildew-resistant silicone
1. Dow Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Project No. 99037/50 09952 PVC WALL COVERINGS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09952 - PVC WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Gonditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
i.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. PVC wall panels.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and
termination points.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
E. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
G. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
Project No. 99037/50 09952 PVC WALI.COVERINGS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
-- B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and
corners only.
C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps.
D. Install seams vertical and Plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75
mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams.
E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
3.5 VINYL WALL COVERING PRODUCT DATA SHEET
A. Hopkins House
1. Student Rooms:
a. Manufacturer: Essex 54
b. Pattern: Stoneacre 1 SE-33-38
C. Color: White Sand
2. Corridors:
a. Manufacturer: Essex 54
b. Pattern: Mentmore SP26-04
C. Color: Nimbus
B. Wesley House
1. Student Rooms:
-7a. Manufacturer: Essex 54
b. Pattern: Stoneacre 1 SE-33-38
C. Color: White Sand
2. Corridors:
a. Manufacturer: Tower Contract Vinyl
b. Pattern: Casson Type 1
C. Color: Bone T1-CA-05
d. Width: 54 inches
END OF SECTION 09950
Project No. 99037/50 09950 WALL COVERINGS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall covering
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, and defects.
1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
2. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer.
3. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry
units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
4. Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
5. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity.
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with
fine sandpaper.
E. Install wall liner where wall preparation telegraphs substrate defects, with no gaps or overlaps,
where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished
installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried.
F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not
less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General C:oniply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
Project No. 99037/50 09950 WALL COVERINGS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final Unit of Work.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160
hix) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing
contents.
L Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed.
PART 2 , PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified in each wall
covering Product Data sheet at end of this Section.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. General: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood-veneer wall covering
and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
Project No. 90037/50 09950 WALL COVERINGS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09950-WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
C. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service*performance.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C. Mockups: Prior to installing wall covering, construct mockups for each form of construction and
OW finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
Project No. 99037/50 09950 WALL COVERINGS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Cotton or Canvas Covering over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or
canvas insulation covering:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildewproof.
a. First and Second Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
1) PPG: 6-700 Series Speedhide Ultra Interior Wall Flat Latex 100 Percent
Acrylic.
END OF SECTION 09900
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING - 16
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
40%, b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish.
C. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd-based or polyurethane varnish, as
recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear.
G. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a
primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).
1) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior
enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
A thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm).
1) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater.
C. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
1) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss
Latex.
H. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:
1. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
t
mm).
1) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel #333.
2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss
Latex.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING, - 15
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood •
surfaces:
1. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) PPG: 6-755 Speedhide Interior Water-Based Undercoater.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm).
1) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss
Latex.
E. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork:
1. Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over
a sealer coat and an alkyd-based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying
stain.
a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
b. Stain Coat: Alkyd-based, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-302 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Stain.
C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) PPG 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish.
d. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd-based or polyurethane varnish, as
recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear.
F. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new, interior woodwork:
1. Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over
a sanding sealer. Provide wood filler on open-grain wood before applying first varnish coat.
a. Diller Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) S-W: Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING - 14
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following paint
systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces:
1. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
1) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant
Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry
block units:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm).
"'^ 1) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm).
1) Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215.
2) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Interior Flat Latex Paint.
C. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new, interior plaster surfaces:
1. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd- or latex-based, interior primer, as recommended by
the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
J, manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 .
mm).
1) PPG 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant
Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils(0.071 mm).
1) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell latex Wall and Trim Enamel.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING - 13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1) PPG: 72-1 Sun-Proof Exterior House& Trim Wood Primer Flat-Latex.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, waterborne, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils(0.061 mm).
1) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint.
E. Wood Shakes and Rough Siding: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood shakes
and rough wood siding:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 coats of an acrylic-latex stain.
a. First and Second Coats: Solid-color, exterior, acrylic-latex, wood stain applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
1) PPG: 77-400 Series Pittsburgh Paints Exterior Solid Color Acrylic Latex
Stains.
F. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items.
1. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033
mm).
1) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint.
G. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized)
metal surfaces:
1. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
rnm).
1) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total (Iry film
thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex I louse and Trim Paint.
3.13 INTERIOR PAINT SCIIEDULE
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
,eAW'* a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).
1) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant
Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 2.4 mils(0.061 mm).
1) PPG: 10 Line Pitt-Cryl Exterior Water Base Paint.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete masonry
units:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex block filler applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry mill thickness of not less
than 4.0 mils(0.102 mm).
1) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm).
1) PPG: 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint.
C. Smooth Wood: Provide the following finish systems over smooth wood siding and other smooth,
exterior wood surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior, alkyd or latex, wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
1) PPG: 1-70 or 1-870 Sun-Proof Exterior Wood Primer.
_. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm).
1) PPG: 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint.
D. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior, acrylic latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036
nun).
Proiect No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING - 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins I-louses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
b. Abrasion resistance.
C. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
1. Color retention.
M. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being
used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated
with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected
paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings
are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
t
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following
finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry surfaces:
1. flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
0014" E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Exposed ferrous metal ductwork.
3. Exposed insulation.
4. Accessory items.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pares filled.
I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 FIELI)QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint
material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as
required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative material analysis.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. ...�,�
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
S. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match
exterior.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended
by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according
to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause
the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
t
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or itern being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use of spray equipment will not be allowed.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING -8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
ohl d. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,
faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and
paneling.
e. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
f. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
g. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
5. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's
(SSPC) recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and
according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
the same primer as the shop coat.
6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
F. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats 4f the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. General: Prepare existing surfaces to be painted in accordance with good practice for
surface preparation. Remove loose and/or peeling paint, stains and other defects that will
deter final painting. Sand and wash surfaces to promote adhesion.
2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
3. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If
hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate ** ,
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn,
correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or
other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize
with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
4. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Wash all interior wood trim and doors whether or not scheduled to be painted.
Where replacement windows are installed in areas scheduled for existing finishes to
remain, transition finish of new work to existing and continue to inside edge of
casing.
Scrape existing painted surfaces to remove all loose paint. Sand surfaces to blend
smooth and dust prior to spot priming exposed wood. On interior surfaces where
priming does not leave smooth surface, apply thin film of vinyl spackle, sand and re-
prime.
C. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes
and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth
when dried.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Devoe& Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Moore).
3. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
4. Pratt& Lambert, Inc. (P& Q.
5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that
are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will
be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 5
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description(generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7.2 and 35 deg Q.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
3t
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to the products listed
in the paint schedules. The products of the manufacturer listed in boldface below are the basis
for scheduled finish systems to be provided by other acceptable manufacturers.
B. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING -4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including
label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material
proposed for use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of
coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples.
1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each
type of coating and substrate to be painted.
Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface.
2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply
coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide
required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.
a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate
coating systems of a similar nature.
3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Pipe spaces. .,41w,
f. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Copper.
d. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
C. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming exterior
architectural woodwork.
1 Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior
architectural woodwork.
4. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames.
5. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for shop priming unclad wood windows.
6. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board.
7. Division 9 Section "Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
�5-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
5. Dull gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
."
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09900-PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item
or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether
or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
�b. Acoustical wall panels.
C. Toilet enclosures.
d. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
e. Light fixtures.
f. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
C. Ceiling plenums.
d. t Itility tunnels.
Project No. 99037/50 09900 PAINTING- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
1. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
J. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of constriction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09680
Project No. 99037/50 09680 CARPET-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond or show through surface.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet
installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation."
B. Hook-and-Loop Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10.5, "Hook and Loop Technology."
C. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Stretch-in Installation."
D. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs."
1. Provide seamed edges at stair runners and exposed edges at open wells to stair landings.
2. Provide beveled wood fillers with edges painted or stained to match treads at existing stairs
to create non-trip nosing.
E. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position.
F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgin,,s, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manu6cnirer.
Project No. 99037/50 09080 CARPET-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is
recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer.
C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to match cushion
thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 11.3.
D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION °
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
paterials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:
a. Carpet manufacturer.
b. Carpet cushion manufacturer.
2. Subtloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. For wood Subfloors, verify the following:
Project No. 99037/50 09680 CARPET-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss
of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but
not less than 10 sq.yd. (8.3 sq. m).
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Product[s]: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Manufacturer: Lees
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
b. Pattern: Bello
C. Location: Hopkins House; all locations.
2. Manufacturer: Pawling
a. Walk-off Mats
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Pattern: Berber
d. Material: Polypropylene Carpet EM-20
e. Full Room size mat: Hopkins House
f. Loose mats with bound edge: 4'x6' one each for Wesley and Hopkins.
3. manufacturer: Blue Ridge
a. Color: 9940 Damask.
b. Pattern: Veranda V570
C. Location: Wesley House; Rooms 100ST 1 and 100P
d. Color: 1006 Merlot
e. Pattern: Vista V575
f. Location: Wesley House; all other locations.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
Project No. 99037/50 09680 CARPET-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. '"`
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for
product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers'
products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements will not be
considered.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to umisual traffic, failure of `
Project No. 99037/50 09680 CARPET- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09680-CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Tufted carpet.
2. Woven carpet.
3. Walk-off mats.
4. Carpet cushion.
B. Related Sections include the following:
low 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for
each type of substrate required.
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch-(300-mm-) square Sample.
2. -'Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-(300-mm-) long Samples.
3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch-(150-mm-) square Sample.
4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample.
C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Project No. 99037/50 09680 CARPET- 1
Renovations to Wesley& I-lopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
END OF SECTION 09654 ,
Project No. 99037/50 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS -6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
written instructions and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Lay out sheet flooring to comply with the following requirements:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, and not less than 6 inches(150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of sheet flooring for color shading and pattern at seams according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Avoid cross and butt seams.
5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during the drying process
(stove bar marks) according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cut sheet flooring to form integral base of height
indicated at vertical surfaces. Form integral flash cove base by flashing sheet flooring up vertical
surfaces. Support floor covering at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt floor
covering at top of base against cap strip.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing flooring products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended in writing by
floor covering manufacturer.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil using method and cleaner recommended in
writing by floor covering manufacturer.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
L Do not move lhea-,7 and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Clean floor coverings according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. After cleaning, polish flooring according; to floor covering manufacturer's written
recommendations.
Project No. 99037/50 09654 LINOLEI JM FLOOR COVERINGS -5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain floor covering.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with linoleum floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions
for preparing substrates indicated to receive linoleum floor coverings.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds,
and nosings.
C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
I Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply
with adhesive and floor covering manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel
notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
1:. Roll floor coverings according to floor covering manufacturer's written instructions.
G. 1 leas-Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections
into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's
Project No. 99037/50 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) in roll form for each 500 linear feet (150
linear m)or fraction thereof, of each product, color, and pattern of linoleum sheet flooring
installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Forbo Industries, Inc.
Marmoleum, Real, Fresco or Dual as selected by Architect.
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Linoleum Floor Coverings: Consisting of oxidized linseed or other vegetable drying oil and rosin,
mixed with ground cork or wood flour, mineral filler, and pigments. Mixture is bonded and
keyed to a burlap (jute) or other suitable fibrous backing so that backing is partially embedded in
mixture. Patterns and colors extend through entire floor covering thickness.
B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer for
products and substrate conditions indicated.
D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding
linoleum seams.
1. Color: Match field color of floor covering.
E. Cove Strip: 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) radius support for integral flash cove base provided or approved
by floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of linoleum floor coverings will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B. For wood subfloors, verify the following:
Project No. 99037/50 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of linoleum floor covering specified „ftk
from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver linoleum floor coverings and related products to Project site in manufacturer's original,
unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project
identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Store rolls upright.
E. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at
least 72 hours in advance of installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in
spaces to receive linoleum floor coverings for at least 72 hours before installation, during
installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation. After postinstallation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q.
B. Do not install linoleum floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
C. Maintain relative humidity in spaces to receive linoleum floor coverings before, during, and after
installation within the range recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
E. Installjinoleum floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting and ceiling
installation, have been completed.
1:. Do not install linoleum floor coverings over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor covering manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture tests.
1.7 11-'XTRA MATERIALS
A. burnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective: covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
Project No. 99037/50 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09654- LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Linoleum sheet flooring, seamless installation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of units showing
the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: Of each heat-welding bead and flooring product, color, and pattern
combination required, with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-
mm)sample made and applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing linoleum floor coverings similar to those required for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Engage an installer who is competent in technique required by manufacturer for heat-
welding seams.
2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by manufacturer.
Project No. 99037/50 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
1. Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection
for Substantial Completion.
2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place
plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being
moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean sheet vinyl floor coverings not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean floor
coverings according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 09652
Project No. 99037/50 09652 SI IEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, and not less than 6 inches(150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of sheet vinyl floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams according
to manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,
thresholds, and nosings.
E. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cut sheet vinyl floor coverings to form integral base
of height indicated at vertical surfaces.
F. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
H. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates to comply with floor covering
manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
2. Form integral flash cove base by flashing floor covering up vertical surfaces. Support floor
covering at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt floor covering at top of
base against cap strip.
I. Heat Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections
into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's
written instructions and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
J. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings
in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by
roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor
covering manufacturer.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor covering until after time period recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
Project No. 99037/50 09652 SI IEET VINYL, FLOOR COVERINGS-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain sheet vinyl floor coverings.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions
for preparing substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do riot use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing sheet vinyl floor
coverings. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting, if
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. I av out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction.
Project No. 99037/50 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, as determined by floor covering manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture test.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) in roll form for each 500 linear feet (150
linear m) or fraction thereof, of each different composition, wearing surface, color, and
pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide Forbo Industries;Smaragd.
2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings with Backing: Products complying with ASTM F 1303-90, Type 1,
Grade 1, Class B Backing.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding seams.
L Color: Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering.
D. Cove Strip: 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) radius support for integral flash cove base provided or approved
by floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - F:XECIJTION
3.1 LXAMINATION
Project No. 99037/50 09652 SHL E'T VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who is competent in the technique required by
manufacturer for heat-welding seams.
1. Engage installers who are certified by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welded seam
installation.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified
from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in manufacturer's
original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer,
Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C).
C. Store rolls upright.
D. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning periods are
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in
spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours before installation, during
installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written
recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg C).
B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space
where jhey are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during sheet vinyl floor covering installation and for time period after
installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
F. Wliere demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of sheet vinyl
floor coverings, install floor coverings before these items are installed.
Project No. 99037/50 09652 SI IEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09652-SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings without backing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other
accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of seams and edges. Indicate location of columns, doorways,
enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutout locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of units showing
the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-
230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified,
showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. for heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm) long, of each color specified.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of sheet vinyl floor coverings certifying that each
product furnished complies with requirements.
F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
G. Maintenance Data: For sheet vinyl floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division I.
Project No. 99037/50 09652 SIIEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.
1. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until
inspection for Substantial Completion.
2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or
hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 09651
Project No. 99037/50 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING -6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures,
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply
with the manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive
mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I-I. Hand roll tiles according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with
adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
C. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
oow-
Project No. 99037/50 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING - 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements
specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain flooring.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for
preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Use stair-tread-nose filler, according to resilient tread manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTAI-LATION
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles
at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that
equal less than one-half of a the at perimeter.
Project No. 99037/50 09651 RESILIENT TILE I,LOORING - 4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated.
1. Resilient Tile:
a. Endura Rubber Flooring; Sculptured or Bison
b:. Nora Rubber Flooring; Hammered or Grano
2. Accessories: Same as Tile Manufacturer
2.2 RESILIENT TILE
A. Rubber Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1344 and with requirements specified in
the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Stair Treads: Products of style suitable for use indicated and complying with FS RR-T-
650, Composition A and with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
B. Risers: Products of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified
in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer
to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with
# Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and
Project No. 09037/50 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each
bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling
instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless
longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in
spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at
least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer
time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 a�*w
deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. burnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
pattern, class,wearing surface, and size of resilient tile flooring installed.
2. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or
fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient accessory installed.
Project No. 99037/50 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING - 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rubber floor tile.
2. Resilient wall base and accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile
specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. For resilient accessories, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 12 inches
(300 mm)long, of each resilient accessory color and pattern specified.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product
furnished complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
Project No. 09037/50 09651 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel ,00%,
surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
4. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to perm _iently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
Project No. 99037/50 09511 ACOt JSTICAI- PANEL CEILINGS-0
Renovations to Wesley& I lopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. U.B.C.'s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings":
U.B.C. Standard 25-2.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum
of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws,
or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8
inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and
not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect
securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
I'. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space.
2. Por reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal
in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
Project No. 99037/50 09511 ACO1 ISTICAL PANEL CEILINC;S-5
Renovations to Wesley& I Iopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
C. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect
ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
�. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-/dung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings—Seismic
"/ones 0-2."
Project No. 99037/50 09511 ACO1 ISTICAI_ PANEL CEILINGS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns:
1. Armstrong World Industries; "Cirrus," angled, tegular, 24x24x3/4 panels with
HumiGuard Plus performance and 15 year warranty.
C. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard
antimicrobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of
alkylated phosphoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fungus,
mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria.
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Products: Armstrong World Industries; Type-1, concealed, 15/16 Prelude Plus; hot dip
galvanized or aluminum.
C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are
indicated.
D. Attachment. Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-
inch-(2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
F. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details
and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
L Por lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal
of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
2.3 ACOt ISTICAL SEALANT
Project No. 99037/50 09511 ACOt ISTICAL PANEL C1:I1_INGS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& I-lopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIAIS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering loi storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAI-
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings,
and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. ,
Project No. 99037/50 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or
sections of acoustical panels, suspension systems, and moldings showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of ceiling assembly indicated.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
D. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acoustical panel ceiling's and components' compliance
with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
L4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel
ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
Project No. 99037/50 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS- I
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and
embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's
written recommendations.
B. Backer Units: Reinforce joints between backer units with fiber-mesh joint tape and embedding
material according to unit manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Aluminum Trim: Apply and embed joint tape over flanges of aluminum trim accessories if
recommended in writing by trim manufacturer.
3.7 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations.
I. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts metal door frames, windows, and other units in veneer
plaster, groove finish coat to eliminate spatting.
2. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from exposure to light.
Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to faded
face paper according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by
Architect.
B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit gypsum veneer plaster in the following areas where veneer plaster will
be concealed from view in the completed Work, unless otherwise indicated or required to
maintain fire-resistance rating. Do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture,
furnishings, and similar removable items.
I. Above suspended ceilings.
2. Behind wood paneling and other permanently applied wall or ceiling finishes.
C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish.
END OF SECTION 09215
Project No. 99037/50 09215 GYPSUM VENDER PLASTER- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins IJouses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for
locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including
sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
L. Fastener Spacing: According to referenced gypsum base for gypsum veneer plaster application
standard, manufacturer's written recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches(304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
3.4 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall/partition panels to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum base panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing),
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gyp sum base
panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no
end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with bugle head drywall
screws.
C. Curved Partitions:
1. Install gypsum base panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved
surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to
them.
2. Wet gypsum base panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius
prevents using dry panels. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that
precede installing wetted panels.
3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten
gypsum base panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start
fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels
to framing with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
4. Allow wetted panels to dry before applying joint reinforcement.
D. Backer t Jnits: Install with bugle head stainless steel screws.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
Project Noy. 99037/50 09215 GYPStJM VENEER PIASTER-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 APPLYING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844, unless manufacturer's written
recommendations are more stringent.
1. Do not allow gypsum base to fade from exposure to light.
2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) offsets between planes of gypsum
base faces, and 1/8 inch in 8 feet 0 mm in 2.4 m) for level, plumb,warp, and bow.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets befo, installing gypsum base for veneer plaster, unless
blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch 0.5 mm)of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut
edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other
than control joints at corners of framed openings.
F. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Float panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to
counteract wood shrinkage.
H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining panels.
I. Cover both faces partition framing with panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in
chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2 Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut panels to fit profile formed by joists, and other structural members;
allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-(6.4-to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant.
J. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by
manufacturer, install panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.
K. Seal construction at perimeters and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of
acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through
Project No. 90037/50 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS ,
A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: In material recommended by gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Material produced and recommended by gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material and gypsum veneer plaster
applications indicated.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For fastening backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing),
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
L Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber-type requirements of
assembly.
2.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES
A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum
veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
PART 3 - IiXECt JTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Project No. 99037/50 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588 and products of same manufacturer as plaster.
1. Regular Type: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated..
a. Location: Vertical and ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick.
a. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
C. Backing Panels for PVC Wall Finish: ASTM C 1178 glass mat water-resistant board, as
manufacturer by G-P Gypsum Corp.
1. Product: "Dens-shield Tile Backer"
2. Thickness: I/ 2 inch.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer
plaster applications indicated.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, except plastic in bath and toilet
rooms.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Use at exposed panel edges.
C. L-Bead: Use where panels abut dissimilar finishes.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Gordon, Inc.; Architectural Aluminum Specialties.
C. MM Systems Corporation.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5.
3. finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint reinforcing and plaster materials
specified.
4. Profile: "W" reveal with 5/8" reveal, 5/8" deep. Provide at below solid surface window
stools and wood wall caps between stairs where indicated
Project No. 99037/50 09215 GYPS1 JM VENEER PIASTER- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 80 deg F
(27 deg C) for 7 days before application of gypsum base and gypsum veneer plaster, continuously
during application, and after application until veneer plaster is dry.
C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly.
1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster.
2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal
drying conditions.
3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during veneer plaster application and until it is dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster:
a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Cameo Veneer Plaster.
b. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal Plaster.
C. United States Gypsum Co.; DIAMOND Interior Finish Plaster.
B. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587 and formulated for application directly
over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material.
2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS
AWWN
Project No. 99037/50 09215 GYPSI JM VENEER PIASTER- 2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09215 -GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum veneer plaster assemblies
not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch (300-mm) length for each trim accessory
indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Gypsum Veneer Plaster Products: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products,
including gypsum base, joint reinforcing tape, embedding material, and plasters, from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum veneer plaster assembles with fire-resistance
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
ooft
Project No. 99037/50 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
' H. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting
surface.
1. Mastic Spot Installation System: Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass backing where approved in
writing by manufacturers of mirrored glass and backing material.
1. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of
mounting surface.
J. Install permanent means of support at bottom and top edges with bottom support designed to
withstand mirrored glass weight and top support designed to prevent mirrored glass from coming
away from wall along top edges.
1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed
with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads
on backs of mirrored glass units.
2. Install top trim. Fabricate trim in single lengths to fit and cover top edge of mirrored glass
units.
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent
labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way,
including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Wash mirrored glass not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date for Substantial Completion. Wash mirrored glass by methods recommended in
NAAMM publication and in writing by mirrored glass manufacturer. Use water and glass
cleaners free from substances capable of damaging mirrored glass edges or coatings.
END OF SECTION 08800
Project No. 09037/50 08800 GIAZING - 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Glass Lites: Outer lite of mirrored float glass with silvered coating on second surface
and inner lite of clear float glass.
b. Interlayer Material: Mirrored glass manufacturer's standard 0.030-inch-thick,
polyvinyl-butyral interlayer.
C. Seal edges of laminated units to comply with written requirements of interlayer
manufacturer.
D. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
C. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
D. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
E. Provide spacers for glass lires where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as
follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
of tape.
F. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
dazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements
in referenced glazing publications.
G,. Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer
and with referenced DANA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass accurately in place
in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
Project No. 99037/50 08800 GLAZING-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass liter in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F. Miscellaneous Materials for Mirror Units:
1. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass
manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
2. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrored
glass by spot application, certified by both mirrored glass manufacturer and mastic
manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrored glass will
be installed.
3. Extruded-Aluminum Top Trim: J-channels in lengths required to cover bottom edge of
each mirrored glass unit in a single piece.
4. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project,
with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written
instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system
performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
C. Mirror Glass: Fabricate mirrored glass units to comply with the following:
L Cut mirrored glass to final sizes and shapes to suit Project conditions and to produce units
with flat polished edges. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrored glass without
marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts to fit closely around penetrations in
mirrored glass.
2. Seal edges of silvered mirrored glass atter edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
3. Laminated Safety Glass Mirrors: Provide laminated mirrored glass fabricated to produce
units free from foreign substances, air or glass pockets, and other defects, and complying
AW with ASTM C 1172, Kind LM, and the t-011owin2:
Project No. 09037/50 08800 GLAZING - 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 MIRROR GLASS
A. Mirrored Glass: Provide mirrored glass that complies with the following:
1. Silvered Mirrored Glass: Clear float glass with successive layers of chemically deposited
silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic
protective coating applied to second glass surface to produce a coating system complying
with FS DD-M-411.
2.3 PATTERNED GLASS
A. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Form 3
(patterned), Quality q8 (glazing), Finish fl (patterned one side); of pattern indicated in the
Patterned-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II (patterned glass,
flat), Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned), Quality q8 (glazing), Finish fl (patterned one side); of
pattern indicated in the Patterned-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.4 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other
requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. interlayer: interlayer material as indicated below, clear or in colors, and of thickness indicated
with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical
properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
1. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets or cured resin.
C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air
or glass pockets as follows:
1. Laminate liter with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.
2. Laminate lites with Laminated glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured
transparent resin interlayer.
15 MISCELLANEOUS GIAZING MATERIALS
Project No. 99037/50 08800 GIAZING - 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08800-GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Doors.
2. Interior borrowed lites.
3. Unframed mirrors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-(300-mm-)square Samples for glass.
1. Each type of glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: Prepare a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
D. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's
"Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of
Mirrors."
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I(transparent glass, flat), Quality q3.
Project No. 99037/50 08800 GLAZING- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer
shall perform the following:
1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors,
door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures.
3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,
materials, or installation of door hardware units.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. See Door Schedule for Hardware Set Designations.
B. All doors to be provided with 1 1/z pair of butts, strikes and door stop.
p 1. Schedule indicates door hardware to be provided, in addition to above.
2. Lock System: Provide Master Ring ML 2000 System.
END OF SECTION 08711
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 15
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A 115 series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A 115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment "
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, in equipment
room. Verify location with Architect.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock
bolt.
2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured
to the leading edge of the door.
Project No. 99037/50 0871 1 DOOR HARDWARE - 14
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors.
b. Strike plates to frames.
C. Closers to doors and frames.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
2.15 FINISHES
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
00W the if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
following:
1. BHMA 612: Satin bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal.
2. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections
before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for
gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
E. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.
F. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252.
G. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only t] ose units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
H. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
2.13 THRESHOLDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
4. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.21.
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming
methods if different from specified standard.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with
finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
ems" 1. Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES).
2. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16.
2. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15.
C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1.
D. Electromagnetic Door Holders for Labeled Fire Door Assemblies: Coordinate with fire detectors
and interface with fire alarm system.
E. Floor Stops: For doors, where wall stops are not appropriate provide floor stops. Do not mount
floor stops where they will impede traffic.
F. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4
inch(16 by 19 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
G. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade l; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2
inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.12 DOOR GASKETING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Door Gasketing:
a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
2. Door Bottoms:
a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
C. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light,
or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - I I
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.9 CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Surface-Mounted Closers:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN); Model 4011 or 4111.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Closers: BHMA A156.4.
C. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1.
D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency
of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for
opening force.
2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Metal Protective Trim Units:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
C. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
d. Pawling Corporation(PAW).
e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
C. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following:
1. Bronze: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick; beveled top and 2 sides.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm) thick; beveled top and 2 sides.
D. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of
either machine or self-tapping screws.
E. Furnish protection plates sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2
inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule.
2.11 STOPS AND MOLDERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: 100,,
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the
following notation:
a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
a. Master Keys: Five.
2.7 STRIKES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Electric Strikes:
a. Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A 156.5.
4. Electric Strikes: BHMA A 156.5.
C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
D. Electric Strikes: BHMA Grade 1.
2.8 OPERATING TRIM
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
C. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
D. Materials: Fabricate from bronze or stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Push-Pull Design: Hager 3G pull w/60S 4x16 push plate.
1. Provide Stainless steel finish on bath/toilet room side of doors
2. Provide Satin Bronze finish on Corridor side of doors
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE -9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1.
B. Exit Locks: Surface-mounted deadbolts or latchbolts, with battery-powered alarm that sounds
when unauthorized use of door occurs; housed in metal case. Provide red-and-white pressure-
sensitive lettering reading"PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM WILL SOUND."
2.5 DOOR BOLTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. Flush Bolts:
a. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
C. Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, designed for mortising into door edge.
D. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire
door requirements, and as follows:
1. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm) throw; listed and labeled for fire-rated
doors.
2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5.
C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the
following:
L Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the
core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
E. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying
with the following requirements:
I. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE -8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Mechanical Locks and Latches:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
2. Electromechanical Locks and Latches:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12.
3. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.5.
C. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA Grade 1; Series 1000.
D. Interconnected Locks: BHMA Grade L
E. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA Grade 1.
F. Lock Trim: Comply with the following:
1. Lever: Wrought, forged, or cast.
2. Escutcheon(Rose): Wrought, forged, or cast.
3. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
G. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule
comply with the following:
1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
2. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12.
H. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire
door requirements, and as follows:
1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.
2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm)bolt throw.
I. Rabbeted Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
J. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. F;lectromechanical Locks: Motor-operated locks of types and grades indicated;with electromagnet
attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following:
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Hinges:
a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
C. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 mm).
D. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Entrance Doors: Extra-Heavy-weight hinges.
2. All other Doors: Heavy-weight hinges.
3. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.
E. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Exterior Hinges: Brass,with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads.
2. Interior Hinges: Steel,with steel pin.
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel,with steel pin.
F. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or
on Drawings:
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications:
a. Outswinging exterior doors.
2. Corners: Square.
G. Electrified Functions for Hinges: Comply with the following:
1. Electrical Contact: Exposed electrical contacts for transfer of power.
2. Power Transfer: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous
through hinge knuckle.
3. Monitoring: Concealed electrical monitoring switch.
4. Power Transfer and Monitoring: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and
continuous through hinge knuckle, and with concealed electrical monitoring switch.
I-1. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE -6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
E. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door
hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end
of Part 3.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturer's products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end
of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE -5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Bevel raised thresholds with a
slope of not more than 1:2.
2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf(67 N) to release the latch.
Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
b. Door Closers: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required
width.
C. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that
are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver construction keys to Owner.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast
anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door
hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware
with connections to fire alarm system and detection devices and future access control system.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE -4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
"* G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity
and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course
of the Work to consult with Contractor,Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced door hardware
supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to
manufacturer of primary materials.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's
standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical
modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, are acceptable.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),
ANSI Al 17.1, FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards," and 521 CMR of
the Commonwealth of Massachusetts as follows:
a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to
grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting
of the wrist.
b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements
indicated:
Ow 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf(22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door "
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the
end of Part 3.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
C. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence
of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that
occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter;
authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter;
unauthorized person wants to exit.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product
Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction
schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data,
coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar
information has been completed and accepted.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
I. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors
complies with listed fire door assemblies.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article.
1. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses of architects and
owners, and other information specified.
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1. AMW
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Other doors to the extent indicated.
2. Electrified door hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors" for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled
assembly.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,
purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. System schematic.
b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.
C. Riser diagram.
d. Elevation of each door.
2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm or access control system.
'*
Project No. 99037/50 08711 DOOR HARDWARE - 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A0011 A. Adjust operating sash and hardware for tight fit at contact points and weather stripping. Provide
unencumbered operation and weathertight closure.
B. Adjust shades to hang true in line without rack. Provide unencumbered operation.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean exterior and interior of units immediately after installation according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
B. Protect units from damage or deterioration until date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08610
1"k
Awk
Project No. 99037/50 08610 ROOD WINDOWS -5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Hinges: Continuous or minimum two per unit.
I. Anchors, Clips, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive anchors, clips, and
fasteners.
1. Provide units of sufficient strength to withstand physical-load-test pressure indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Roof Windows: Provide weathertight units complete with flashing, anchoring devices, and
operating hardware for venting units.
1. Provide weather stripping at perimeter of operating sash.
2. Provide condensation gutter or other means to hold condensate (moisture) or drain it to
exterior.
3. Factory-glaze units to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section"Glazing."
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying finishes.
B. Color-Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness. _'VON
1. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings and adjacent areas before installation. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for installing roof windows,
hardware, operators, and accessories.
1. Set units true in line, without warp or rack in frame or sash, and anchored securely in
glare.
?. Install flashing to provide: a weathertight seal.
3.3 ADJUSTING
Project No. 99037/50 08610 ROOI'WINDOWS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Wood: Comply with NWWDA I.S.7 requirements.
1. Provide ponderosa pine or other suitable lumber kiln dried to moisture content between 6
and 12 percent at time of machining.
2. Provide visible interior frame and sash parts (where applicable) free of unsound knots,
pitch pockets, or surface checks larger than 1/8 inch deep by 2 inches long (3 mm deep by
50 mm long).
3. Provide visible interior frame and sash parts (where applicable) indicated to receive
transparent finish free of blue stain.
4. Provide wood with preservative treatment applied after machining according to NWWDA
I.S.4 requirements.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M); alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for use and finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability
properties of alloy 6063-T5.
C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for use and finish indicated.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Roof Window Frame: Manufacturer's standard curb type frame of the following material:
1. Aluminum-clad wood.
B. Roof Window Sash: Manufacturer's standard sash of the following material:
C. Roof Window Sash: Manufacturer's standard sash of one of the following materials:
1. Aluminum and wood.
D. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard flashing system for applications indicated.
E. Insulating Glass: Clear, sealed, insulating-glass units that comply with Division 8 Section
"Glazing," in manufacturer's standard thickness and as follows:
1. Type: Low-E, argon filled, with laminated-glass inboard lite and outboard lite of fully
tempered glass.
F. Glazing Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-vinyl or-butyl glazing gasket, or butyl or neutral-
cure silicone sealant.
G. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard compression-type weather stripping of molded vinyl
complying with ASTM D 2287; molded, expanded EPDM or neoprene complying with
ASTM C 509; or other suitable material.
H. Ilardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant operating hardware.
L Operator: Rotary operator complying with AAMA 901.1.
00K 2. Operator: Spring-assisted, counter-balanced operator that allows sash to remain open in
any position with handle-operated latches and lock.
Project No. 99037/50 08610 ROOF WINDOWS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
causing unit malfunction or impairing unit operation and with residual deflection of
members not exceeding 0.4 percent of their span.
C. Minimum Test Pressure: 150 percent of design wind load.
4. Thermal Conductance: As follows:
a. Test Procedure: NFRC 100.
b. Maximum U-Value, Size AA: 0.50 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (4.15 W/sq. to x K).
B. Provide roof windows capable of withstanding 401b. psf live loads and snow loads indicated
without failure of materials or permanent deformation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof window specified. Include the following:
1. Construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,
and finishes.
2. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
3. Glazing details.
4. Flashing details.
5. Hardware, operators, and accessories.
B. Product Test Reports: By a qualified testing agency indicating current roof window complies with
requirements.
C. Maintenance Data: For roof windows to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roof windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Andersen Windows, Inc.
2. Pella Corporation.
3. Roto Prank of America, Inc.; Roro Roof Windows.
4. Velux-America Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
Pnoiect No. 99037/50 08610 ROOF WINDOWS-2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08610- ROOF WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fixed roof windows.
2. Venting roof windows.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Glazing" for glazing requirements for factory-glazed roof windows.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide roof windows that have the following capabilities based on testing of manufacturer's
standard units using test methods indicated:
1. Air Leakage: As follows:
a. Air-Infiltration Test: ASTM E 283, at uniform static-air-pressure difference of 1.57
lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
b. Air-Exfiltration Test: Test interior face of unit according to procedure in
ASTM E 283, at uniform static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
C. Maximum Air Leakage (Infiltration and Exfiltration): 0.10 cfm/sq. ft. (0.000155
cros/sq. m).
2. Water Penetration: As follows:
a. Water-Penetration Test: ASTM E 547; provide units that sustain minimum test
pressure indicated without leakage.
b. Minimum Test Pressure: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
3. Structural Performance: As follows:
a. Design Wind Load: 40 lbf/sq. ft. (1915 Pa).
b. Physical Load Test: ASTM F 330; provide units that sustain minimum test pressure
indicated without glass breakage, hardware damage, or permanent deformation
Project No. 90037/50 08610 ROOF WINDOWS - I
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration until the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08550
Project No. 09037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings before installation.
1. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets
at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3
inches (75 mm) of corner.
2. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components.
3. Field measure all existing openings for sizing of replacement window units.
4. Prepare schedule of windows by type and location. Include interior finish requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing window
units, hardware, operators, accessories, and other components of the Work.
B. Set window units level, plumb, true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide
proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as indicated, to provide
weathertight construction.
D. Provide interior wood trim scribed to existing returns to compensate for variations in existing
frame and new frames.
E. Seal entire perimeter at exterior with sealant. Provide foam-in-place sealant bead over packed
fiberglass backing material at gaps on interior before applying scribed trim.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping
for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces immediately after installation. Exercise care to avoid damage
to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other
substances.
B. Clean glass of factory-glazed units immediately after installing windows. Wash and polish glass on
both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces.
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
the construction period.
3.5 PROTE(;TION
Prc�jcct No. 99037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Provide sash only for installation in existing openings.
C. Frames for existing sash: Provide clad frames where salvaged window sash units are shown in new
openings.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wood window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete
system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
1. Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2 for moisture content of lumber at time of
fabrication.
B. Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing. Provide
openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items.
1. Provide weather stripping at perimeter of each operating sash.
a. For double-hung sash, provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable
sash.
2. Provide removable insect screen for each operating sash, with location determined by
manufacturer.
3. Provide glazing stops, nailed or snap-on type, coordinated with glass selection and glazing
system indicated.
4. Factory-Glazed Window Units: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches (2500
mm width plus length), glaze window units in the factory before delivery, unless factory
glazing is not available from manufacturer. Comply with requirements of Division 8
Section "Glazing" of these Specifications and NWWDA I.S. 2.
C. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment
to the Project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Wood Finish: Provide the following finishes on exposed wood in units:
I. Shop-Pruned Units: Provide shop-prime coat on interior wood surfaces only.
2. Unfinished Units: Provide interior units unfinished when installed in existing openings
with natural finish casings and trim.
PART 3 - EXECI JTION
Project Nu. 99037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS- 6
,......�
Renovations to Wesley& I lopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate
screens on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type. Design
windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a
minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
1. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped, extruded- or formed-aluminum
members of 0.040-inch-(1-mm-) minimum wall thickness,with mitered or coped joints and
concealed mechanical fasteners. Provide removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of
screen frame. Comply with SMA 1004. Provide with retention clips.
a. Finish: Match window members.
B. True Divided Lites: Provide patterns to match existing windows.
2.5 CASEMENT WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP 15.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
1. Operating Device: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill.
2. Hinges: Concealed four-bar friction hinges with adjustable slide shoe(two per ventilator).
3. Hinges: Heavy-duty, two-knuckle butt hinges (two per ventilator, minimum).
4. Lock: Lift-type, cam-action lock.
5. Limit Device: Stay bar with an adjustable hold-open device.
2.6 DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP15.
1. Provide window units with tilt-in feature permitting both sides of the sash to be cleaned
from interior.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
1. Sash Balances: Manufacturer's standard, concealed, counterbalancing-mechanism-type sash
balances (two per sash).
2 Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep lock and keeper on meeting rail.
3. Lift Handle: Applied sash lifts on bottom rail of lower sash(two per sash).
2.7 FIXED WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP 15.
Project No. 99037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation.
2. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation.
F. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when sash
is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287.
2. Weather-Stripping Material: Molded, expanded, EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying
with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
G. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or
nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.2.
1. Provide weather stripping with integral, centerline barrier fin of semirigid, plastic,
polypropylene sheet.
H. Wire-Fabric Insect Screen: 18-by-14 (1.2-by-1.6-mm) or 18-by46 (1.2-by-1.4-mm) mesh of 0.013-
inch-(0.3-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII.
I. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide manufacturer's standard Maximizer Plus argon filled,
sealed, insulating glazing material that complies with Division 8 Section"Glazing."
J. Glazing Seal: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded, vinyl, or butyl glazing gasket providing
weathertight seal.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, necessary to operate, tightly close, and
securely lock windows. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.
1. Provide solid white metal hardware with a special coating finish and plated steel or
brass/bronze operating bars and rods.
B. Four-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.1.
1. friction Shoes: Nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material.
C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901.1 for rotary operators. Comply with
ASTM E 405, Method A, when subjected to operating moments and closing torques indicated in
AAMA 101.
1. Operator shall operate all ventilators simultaneously, securely closing them at both jambs
without using additional manually controlled locking devices.
D. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.2.
1. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed block-and-tackle type: of size and capacity to hold sash
stationary at any open position.
Project No. 99037/50 08550 WOOC) WINDOWS-4
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by wood window manufacturer, agreeing
to repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C. Warranty Period for Insulating Glass: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide window units the following:
1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Window Units:
a. Eagle Window Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
POW
A. General: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2.
B. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber, kiln dried to a moisture
content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots,
Pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch(0.8 mm)wide by 2 inches (51 mm)long.
1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining per NWWDA I.S. 4.
C. Aluminum Cladding: Manufacturer's standard aluminum formed sheet or extruded cladding
mechanically bonded to exterior wood sash and frame members.
1. Trim Members: Provide aluminum-clad wood, hollow-aluminum extrusions, or roll-
formed aluminum trim members.
2. Finish: Factory-applied, baked-on enamel finish.
a. Color: White.
D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum,
nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with requirements of
ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide sufficient strength to withstand design
pressure indicated.
E. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's
recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners.
Project No. 99037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins I-louses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window required. Include the following:
1. Construction details and fabrication methods.
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of window required. Include information not fully detailed in
manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following:
1. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood window units through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic
effects of wood windows and are based on the specific window types and models indicated.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered
provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic
effect. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions."
C. Safety Glass Standard: Provide products complying with testing requirements of 16 CFR,
Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with
the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant
Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify window openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Project No. 99037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08550-WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following wood-window types:
1. Casement windows.
2. Double-hung windows.
3. Nonoperative(fixed)windows.
4. Decorative windows.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior and exterior wood trim not included as
part of wood window units.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for wood windows, including factory-
glazed window units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance-grade number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual
design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine the structural test
pressure and water test pressure.
1. Structural test pressure, wind-load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure.
2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 10 percent of the design pressure
with 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. (137 Pa) as a minimum.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal
thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing
manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, and sizes required for this
Project according to test methods indicated.
B. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force, air infiltration, water penetration,
structural performance, and forced-entry resistance for wood windows are those specified in
AOW' NWWDA I.S. 2, "Industry Standard for Wood Window Units."
Project No. 99037/50 08550 WOOD WINDOWS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
AORW C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08212
Project No. 99037/50 082 12 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and
quality of construction.
D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water repellent to comply with
NWWDA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written -40**=
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below, do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-tire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.
D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting."
2. Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stains."
3.3 ADJt1STING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do riot swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
Project No. 99037/50 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction, General: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade of Doors for Transparent Finish: Premium.
2. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Species selected to match existing doors
and trim, plain sawed/sliced.
3. Stile and Rail Construction for Transparent Finish: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for
width. Select stock for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match
between adjacent pieces.
4. Stile and Rail Construction for Opaque Finish: Clear softwood; may be edge glued for
width or finger jointed.
5. Raised Panel Construction for Transparent Finish: Clear lumber, edge glued for width.
Select stock for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between
adjacent pieces.
6. Raised Panel Construction for Opaque Finish: Clear softwood lumber, edge glued for
width.
7. Flat Panel Construction for Transparent Finish: Veneered,wood-based panel product.
8. Flat Panel Construction for Opaque Finish: Veneered, wood-based panel product.
B. Exterior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: As indicated.
3. Raised Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1-1/8 inches (29 mm).
4. Panel Design: As indicated.
5. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, insulating-glass units made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick,
Clear, fully tempered glass with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) airspace.
C. Interior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: As indicated.
3. Raised Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1-1/8 inches (29 mm).
4. Flat Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Panel Design: As indicated.
6. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, laminated glass made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick
annealed glass.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting.
B. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying
with Division 8 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing
sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood stops.
Project No. 99037/50 08212 STILL:AND RAIL WOOD DOORS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail
Doors."
a. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with
NWWDA I.S.6.
2. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of
door, construction, finish, and other requirements.
C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI 7_97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR,
Part 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and
permitted.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags
or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet-work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Stile and Rail Doors of Special Design and Construction:
a. ENJO Doors and Windows.
b. Karona, Inc.
C. Maiman Company (The).
d. Pinecrest.
C. Woodtech Trading Company.
Project No. 99037/50 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08212-STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior stile and rail wood doors with raised panels.
2. Exterior stile and rail wood doors raised and glass panels.
3. Exterior stile and rail wood side lights.
4. Interior stile and rail wood doors with raised panels.
5. Interior stile and rail wood doors with flat panels.
6. Interior stile and rail wood doors with glass panels only(French doors).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing.
1. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and
moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by door manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply
with requirements.
1.4 Q1 IALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Project No. 99037/50 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS- 1
OMMOMOMMOMW
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
,., 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below, do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge, trim stiles and rails
only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
Auk
Project No. 90037/50 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are labeled ,..
and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.
Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and
bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
C. Field machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W
series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
D. Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as
specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors
same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and side panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SHOP MODIFICATION
A. Applied Stiles and Rails: Apply 3/8 inch stiles and rails to both faces of flush wood doors where.
indicated. Offset applied trim on stop side to allow seal at gasket and avoid binding when
closing.
Project No. 09037/50 0821 1 FU JS I WOOD DOORS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Shop applied stiles and rails: Where indicated, surface applied stiles and rails will be installed by
Architectural Woodwork Supplier to profiles shown.
B. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium,with Grade AA faces.
2. Species and Cut: Red oak, plain sliced.
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
6. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room
or area of building.
7. Stiles: Same species as faces or a compatible species.
C. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces for Interior Doors: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
1. Core: As required for fire rating.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
B. Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating
indicated.
2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-
holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated to eliminate through-
bolting hardware.
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top rail blocking.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking.
C. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking.
d. 4-1/2-by-10-inch(114-by-250-mm) lock blocks.
3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile matching face veneer, and laminated backing at hinge stiles for improved screw-
holding capability and split resistance.
Project No. 99037/50 08211 FLUS1-1 WOOD DOORS- 3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Cornply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the .7onstruction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials
or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-
inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers
exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm)span.
1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
L Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division.
C. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.
d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
C. Poncraft Door Co.
f. Southwood Door Co.
g. Vancouver Door Company, Inc.
}r. VT Industries Inc.
i. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
Proje(i No . 99037/50 08211 FIJ 1SI i WOOD DOORS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames" for metal door frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors" and
"AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise
rating of 450 deg F (250 deg Q maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND I IANDLING
Project No. 99037/50 08211 FLUSI I WOOD DOORS- I
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying
with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of
enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.
3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from
doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
low&*,
Project Nu. 09037/50 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects, pickled and oiled.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
2.3 FRAMES
A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal
fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frames of 16 ga. thick steel sheet for:
1. Wood fire doors .
C. Gaskets. Provide fire gaskets at all frames.
D. Provide split `retro-fit' frames where installing doors in existing openings.
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, electrolytic
zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be
built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat
in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face
joints where installed in new openings.
2. Fabricate knock-down, drywall slip-on frames for in place gypsum board partitions.
3. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.
C. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
D. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
2.5 I,INISI IES
Project No. 09037/50 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-3
Renovations to Wesley& Ilopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.
2. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise
rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C` maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and
job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors
and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is
found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are
acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-)
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a
humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm)spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company.
C. Curries Company.
d. Kewanee Corporation(The).
C. Pioneer Industries Inc.
f. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.2 MAT ERIAIS
Project No. 99037/50 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire-rated frame assemblies.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door hardware
and weather stripping.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in steel-
framed gypsum board partitions.
4. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are
minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the
uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated'.include door designation, type, level
and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound
and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
2. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
3. Details of each different wall opening condition.
4. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule
for doors and frames.
Project No. 99037/50 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES - 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins I-louses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
g. Tremftex 834; Tremco.
2, Applications: All interior applications subject to painting, except bath and toilet rooms
3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co.
2. Applications: All perimeter joints of new partitions at dissimilar materials
END OF SECTION 07920
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Products: Available products include the following:
Aomftl
a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning.
b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.
C. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc.
d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.
2 Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS(nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. t Jses Related to Joint Substrates: G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
6. Applications: Interior wet locations (bath and toilet rooms).
C. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc.
b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International.
C. Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Mameco International.
d. NR-201; Pecora Corporation.
e. Flexiprene PSI-951; Polymeric Systems, Inc. .,
f. SL l; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc..
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P(pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uselsl Related to Exposure: T(traffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
6. Applications: Horizontal interior and exterior joints.
3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Iatex Sealant : Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with
the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc.
b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc.
C. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc.
d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation.
e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Deck-O-Seal One Step;W.R. Meadows, Inc.
b. Thiokol 1P; Morton International, Inc.
C. GC-9 Synthacalk; Pecora Corporation.
d. PSI-7000; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS(nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
a. Use O joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated
with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick,granite, marble, and wood.
6. Applications: All exterior applications except horizontal joints.
E. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide
products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and
other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and
temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply
with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and
conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and back of joints.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings
are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant
with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS- 6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
"* 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end
of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric
Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates
indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description
indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description
indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's
standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the
following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to
control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive
tape where. applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
-0■..
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F(4.4 deg Q.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are
less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for
each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this
characteristic.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
4. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of
acoustical ceilings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
C. Joints between metal panels.
*, d. Joints between different materials listed above.
f e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
f. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
g. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.
b. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
C. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete
walls and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
C. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
f. Other joints as indicated.
C. Related Sections include the following:
Project No. 99037/50 07920 JOINT SEALANTS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Coat back side of metal roofing with bituminous coating where it will contact wood, ferrous
metal, or cementitious construction.
E. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral ftashings,
and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown
and as required for leakproof construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of the
Work. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Shop fabricate materials
to greatest extent possible.
F. Sealant-Type Joints: Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members
not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), at time of
installation, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints
at temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg Q. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants" for handling and installing sealants.
G. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form
exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering
temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,
welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges,
unless otherwise indicated.
H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
,s minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
I. Tin uncoated copper surfaces at edges of sheets to be soldered, for a width of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm), using solder recommended for copper work. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated,
do not tin edges, but wire brush lead coating before soldering.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure metal roofing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 07610
Project No. 99037/50 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, and with
~. exposed edges folded back to form hems.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, or would not be sufficiently waterproof and weatherproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant (concealed
within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce
weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Separate metal from non:-ompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation
as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
indicated for conditions affecting performance of sheet metal roofing. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
B. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal roofing. Strip with care
to avoid damage to finish.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing to comply with sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install felt underlayment and building's paper slip sheet on substrate under metal roofing, unless
otherwise recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage,
where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roofing. Apply from cave to
ridge in shingle fashion and lap joints 2 inches (50 mm) minimum. -"'
Project No. 99037/50 07610 S14EET METAL ROOFING-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, Polymer-Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum
40 mils (1 mm)thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: W.R. Grace& Co.
C. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Nord Bitumi US, Inc.
d. F210; Northern Elastomeric, Inc.
e. Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
f. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation.
B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and accessory items as required for a complete roofing system and as
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator for metal roofing work, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints, which must be free to move, provide
nonsetting, nonhardening, nonmigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
C. Metal Accessories: Provide components matching sheet metal roofing in finish and material that
are required for a complete roofing system, including the following:
1. Clips, flashings, and ridge closure strips.
2. Trim, copings, fasciae, gutters, and louvers.
D. Elastomeric joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints in roofing that will remain weathertight and as
recommended by the roofing manufacturer for installation indicated.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
mm) dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive
compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown, with metal roofing
manufacturer's written instructions, and with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
installation indicated.
B. Fabricate sheet metal to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage,
damage, and deterioration of the Work. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without
Project No. 99037/50 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed sheet metal roofing
similar in material, design, forming method, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Industry Standard: Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.
C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof assemblies that meet requirements of UL 580 for Class 90
wind-uplift resistance.
1. Maintain current certification of UL follow-up program for field-rolled panels on field-
forming equipment.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal coils, panels, and other roofing materials so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Package roofing materials for protection against transportation damage.
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roofing materials to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof coils and panels to ensure dryness. Do not store coils or
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
~" damage.
1.7 WARRANTY
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Architectural Roofing and Siding, Inc.
2. Fabral/Gentec Building Products, Inc.
3. Merchant& Evans, Inc.
4. Revere Copper Products, Inc.
2.2 ROOFING SIIEET METALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Weight(Thickness): 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated. _W*4,
Project No. 99037/50 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07610-SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing-seam metal roofing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and decking.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing not part of roofing and
other sheet metal work.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Install sheet metal roofing capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, wind loading,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into the building interior.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details for forming, joining, and securing ,netal roofing, and for pattern of
seams. Show expansion-joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining work and at
obstructions and penetrations.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Project No. 99037/50 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING - 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end
laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of sheet flashing terminations.
F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.7 PROTECTION PADS
A. Install protection pads at locations below eaves of slate or metal roofing subject to snow slide.
Heat weld or adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and repair seam sample areas.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
r roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
END OF SECTION 07533
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERMOPIASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6
mm)with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 rnm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
E. Attached Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical
fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck
type indicated.
1. Fasten insulation according to the insulation and roofing system manufacturers' written
instructions.
3.4 ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install thermoplastic sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of 30 minutes.
B. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
D. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
E. Install adhered thermoplastic sheet and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing.
3.5 SEAM INSTALLATION
A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets and flashings according to
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Weld seam as
follows:
1. Weld Method: Hot air.
B. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam calk to seal cut edges of
sheet membrane.
C. Repair tears,voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrate according to
roofing systern manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate and allow to
partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to msk
roofing system manufacturer.
C. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric mat, water
permeable and resistant to ultraviolet degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements.
B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains
are properly clamped into position.
C. Verify that wood nailers are in place and secured and match thicknesses of insulation required.
D. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period recommended
by roofing system manufacturer.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install 2 inches(50 mm) of insulation under area of roofing.
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
g. Weather Resistance: No cracks or crazing after 4000 hours' exposure to xenon-arc;
low ASTM G 26.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with membrane roofing material.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, thickness, and
color as sheet membrane.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1 inch (25 mm)
wide, roll formed and prepunched.
F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately I inch (25 mm)wide by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick, prepunched.
G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet ftashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet (lashings, T-joint covers, seam calk, termination
reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.
2.4 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements, selected from
manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core
formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 1289, classified by facer type
as follows:
1. Facer Type: Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat on both major surfaces.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material.
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without monetary
limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting from
defects in materials or workmanship for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 15 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1. Thermoplastic Polyolefin(TPO)Sheet:
a. Carlisle Syntec Systems; Carlisle Corp.
2. Polyisocyanu rate Board Insulation:
a. Apache Products Co.
b. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
C. Celotex Corp. (The).
d. GAF Materials Corp. '"
e. NRG Barriers, Inc.
2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN SHEET
A. Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible elastomer sheet formed from a
thermoplastic polyolefin, reinforced, of the following thickness, exposed face color, and physical
properties:
1. Thickness: 60 mils 0.5 mm), nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Physical Properties: Provide reinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheets with the following
properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated:
a. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf(1 kN);ASTM D 751, grab method.
b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
C. Tearing Strength: 55 lbf(245 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
d. Resistance to Heat Aging: No reduction in breaking strength, elongation at break,
and tearing strength after 168 hours at 240 deg F(116 deg C);ASTM D 573.
e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent elongated
sample at 100 deg F (38 deg C) and 100-pphm (100-MPa) ozone; ASTM D 1149,
Procedure B.
f. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 168 hours' immersion at
158 deg F(70 deg C); ASTM D 471.
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERLVIOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A;ASTM E 108, for application and slopes indicated.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct conference at Project site to
comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Notify participants at least 5
working days before conference.
1. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
3. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.
4. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
5. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
6. Document proceedings, including corrective measures or actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for
storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
materials from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and
warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Roofing system shall comply with the following:
a. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
D. Roofing System Design: Provide a single-ply roofing system that complies with roofing system
manufacturer's written design instructions and with the following:
I. SPRI's "Wind Design Guide for Adhered Roofing Systems."
a. Exposure Category: Exposure A.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with requirements.
B. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that the roofing system
complies with requirements specified in the "Performance Requirements" Article. Upon request,
submit evidence of meeting requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information "
specified.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by
a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of roofing system
with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions.
F. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty stating obligations,
remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
G. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project and who is approved,
authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
below by UL, FM, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07533-THERMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Adhered sheet roofing.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkway pads.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, cants, and blocking; and
wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings and counterflashings.
3. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not
otherwise defined in this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are watertight;will not permit the
passage of liquid water; and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
C. FM Listing: Provide sheet membrane, base flashings, and component materials that meet
requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FM's
"Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials
with FM markings.
Project No. 99037/50 07533 THEI ILMOPLASTIC SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFIN
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Cut slate at valleys to form open valleys with a straight border. Taper valleys from a 2-inch AWN
(50-mm) exposure of metal flashing on each side of valley at top and increase exposure by 1
inch (25 mm)(each side)per 96 inches (2400 mm) of valley length.
F. Install snow guards as field slate is installed according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions and NRCA's "Steep Roofing Manual." Unless otherwise indicated, locate snow
guards at 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. horizontally, and at every other course vertically, beginning at
second course from gutter. Stagger snow-guard location by 9 inches (225 mm) between courses.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or broken slates.
B. Remove excess slate and debris from Project site.
END OF SECTION 07315
Awk
Project No. 99037/50 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Metal Flashing Installation: Install sheet metal flashing, vent flashing, and edge protection
as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing
Manual."
1. Fabricate metal flashings at open valleys with a minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high standing
rib at center of valley to break force of water flow. Extend metal flashing a minimum of 12
inches (300 mm) onto roof deck on each side of valley.
2. Where flashings occur perpendicular to slope, return sheet metal a minimum of 4 inches
(100 mm) under shingles.
3. If open valley length exceeds 12 feet (3.6 in), taper valleys by increasing width of valley
flashing by 2 inches (50 mm), for I inch (25 mm) on each side, for each 96 inches (2400
mm) of valley.
B. Felt Underlayment Installation: Apply one layer of felt over entire roof surface, beginning at
eaves, with courses perpendicular to slope of roof. Lap succeeding courses 2 inches (50 mm)
minimum, with 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum end laps. Fasten with sufficient nails to hold in
place until slate shingles are installed.
1. For graduated slate roofs and for slopes 4 inches per foot (1:3) or less, apply double-felt
layer adhered with mastic, with joints staggered between layers.
C. Ice-Protection Underlayment: In addition to felt underlayment, install continuous strip of ice-
protection underlayment, consisting of an additional strip of No. 30 roofing felt (to form a two-
ply membrane) along eaves to a point at least 24 inches (600 mm) beyond inside face of outside
wall. Set in a continuous bed of mastic and secure with roofing nails at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
along top edges. Provide minimum 2-inch(50-mm) side laps, sealed with mastic.
D. Perimeter Underlayment: From eaves, apply modified bituminous underlayment to a minimum
of 24 inches (600 mm) inside the inside face of exterior wall line.
1. In addition to eaves, apply minimum 24-inch- (600-mm-) wide layer at entire perimeter of
surfaces to receive roofing slate, including ridges,valleys, and rakes.
E. Slate Shingle Installation: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to written
recommendations of manufacturer and details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing
Manual." Unless otherwise indicated, provide at least a,3-inch (75-mm) head lap between
succeeding courses of slate shingles and break (stagger) joints between courses a minimum of 3
inches (75 mm). Provide a 2-inch (50-mm) projection of slate at eaves and 1-inch (25-mm)
projection at gables. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other
projections through roof.
1. Nail slate shingles so nail heads just touch slate lightly. Do not drive nails home drawing
slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shingle
above.
2. Install ridge and hip covers in lengths as long as practical. Hem and fold seams for weather
tight installation.
Project No. 99037/50 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Chem-Calk 300; Bostik Inc.
b. PTI 757; H.B. Fuller Company.
C. BC-158; Pecora Corporation.
d. PSI 301; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
e. Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. of ChemRex,
Inc.
f. Tremco Butyl Sealant 505; Tremco, Inc.
B. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant as
recommended in writing by shingle manufacturer. Where sealant will be exposed, provide in
color matching shingle.
C. Mastic: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated, asphalt cement designed for trowel application.
D. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, copper or bronze and copper units, designed for use with slate
shingles and complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Berger Building Products.
b. M. J. Mullane Company.
C. Sieger Snow Guards, Inc.
d. Vermont Slate and Copper Services, Inc.
e. Zaleski Snow-Guard and Roofing Specialties Inc.
E. Ridge and Hip Covers: Custom formed copper fabrications for project ridge and hip conditions.
Y Provide for application over Cor-a-vent nailable ridge vent with continuous copper cleat.
1. Accessories: Fabricate flashing, splices, end caps, and other accessories from matching
metal according to SMACNA procedures and details.
2. Product and Manufacturers: Provide Cor-a-vent polypropylene corrugated ridge piece.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and conditions tinder which slate shingle Work is to be performed; notify
Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with slate shingle Work only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Cover or otherwise plug drains to prevent entrance of slate shingle trimmings and debris.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Proceed with slate shingle installation only after substrate construction, vent stacks,
and other penetrating work is complete and when substrate materials are dry.
Project No. 99037/50 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Permanent or unfailing.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SHEET METAL FLASHING
A. Copper Flashing: ASTM B 370, temper H00 (cold rolled), unless temper 060 is required for
forming; 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick), unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, No. 30 asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt;
minimum 36-inch-(900-mm-)wide rolls.
B. Modified Bituminous Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, self-adhering, polymer-modified,
bituminous sheet; 40 mils 0 mm)thick. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Nonreinforced: Polyethylene backed.
1) CCW 707; Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing.
2) WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
3) Grace Ice and Water Shield; W.R. Grace& Co.
4) Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Roofing Nails: 0.1055-inch- (2.7-mm-) diameter-shank, hot-dip galvanized steel, Type ES, barbed-
shank roofing nails; minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) diameter head, and long enough to penetrate
3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing.
B. Slating Nails: 0.135-inch (3.4-mm), diamond-point, smooth-shaft, hard copper-wire slating nails
with large head; minimum 5/16-inch (8-mm) diameter, and long enough to penetrate either
completely through or at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) into sheathing.
C. Slating Nails: Nonferrous-metal, large flat-head slating nail long enough to penetrate either
completely through or at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) into sheathing.
L 'Minimum Nail Length for Shingles More Than 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Thick: Two times the
shingle thickness plus 1 inch (25 mm).
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1085, one-part, nonsag, nonstaining, solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids; with a tack-free time of
24 hours or less.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Project No. 99037/50 07315 SLATE SI-[INGLES- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Deliver slate shingles to Project site and store as close as possible to the point of installation to
minimize damage while handling.
B. Store and handle roofing materials to prevent breakage and ensure dryness. Store in a dry, well-
ventilated, weathertight place. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or
another raised surface.
C. Do not leave unused felts on roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless
protected from weather or other moisture sources.
D. Handle and store materials and equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent
deflection of deck.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Slate Shingles: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide slate shingles by one of the
following:
1. Buckingham-Virginia Slate Corp.
2. Evergreen Slate Co., Inc.
3. North American Slate Co., Inc.
4. Slate International, Inc.
5. Vermont Structural Slate Company, Inc.
2.2 SHINGLES
A. Slate Shingles: Hard, dense, sound rock, machine punched or drilled for two nails located for
proper head lap. No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners
on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof. No ribbons in
exposed portion of shingle, and curvature not to exceed 1/8 inch per 12 inches (3 mm per 300
mm).
1. Classification: ASTM C 406.
a. Grade S1: Expected service life more than 75 years.
2. Thickness: Nominal 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Match existing length and width of slate shingles on each building.
4. Butt Shape: Standard square cut.
Project No. 99037/50 07315 SLATE SHINGLES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
how SECTION 07315 -SLATE SHINGLES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes slate shingles for standard-slate roofs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for roof deck, cant strips, battens, and nailers.
2. Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing, valleys, gutters, and
downspouts.
3. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and sections at hips, gables, ridges, valleys, and eaves;
component details; accessories; and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of slate shingle
indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of slate shingle indicated; in sets for each
color, texture, shape, and size specified, showing the full range of variations expected. Prepare
Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Slate: Obtain each variety of slate from one source with resources to
provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND I IANDI-ING
look-
Project No. 99037/50 07315 SLATE SHINGLES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten
vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at
lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.
C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor
retarder.
E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately
after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
Project No. 99037/50 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection board.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
E. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320.
F. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according
to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for insulation r,-pe, thickness, and application
indicated.
G. Place loose-fill insulation into existing walls cavities, by machine blowing to comply with
ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to
uniform density, but do not compact excessively. Drill holes for blowing insulation into cavities
from interior.
1-1. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation and seal with foamed-in-place bead at all miscellaneous voids
and cavity spaces including around doors and windows before application of finish materials.
Trim back excess foam flush with framing materials.
Project No. 99037/50 07210 BUILDING INSULATION -5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturers written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
1. If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (6 10 mm) below exterior grade
line.
B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying
protection board. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions.
Project No. 99037/50 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses,widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively:
1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Foil-Faced, Poly isocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class [1 or 21 [11121, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests
performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm).
D. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
E. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance,
processing, and handling characteristics.
F. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764 for type (method of application) indicated below;
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5, and as follows:
1. Type 1 for pneumatic application.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders:
a. Raven Industries, Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW.
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.
2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B. Save Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces
= and vented eaves.
Project No. 99037/50 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
L Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. Dow Chemical Company.
b. Owens Corning.
C. Tenneco Building Products.
2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a. Apache Products Company.
b. Celotex Corporation.
C. Johns Manville Corporation.
3. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville Corporation.
C. Knauf Fiber Glass.
d. Owens Corning.
04%.
Project No. 99037/50 07210 BUILDING INSULATION - 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Cavity wall insulation.
3. Concealed building insulation.
4. Loose-fill building insulation.
5. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Division 7 Section "Thermoplastic Single-Ply Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified
as part of roofing construction.
3. Division 15 Sections for pipe, duct or equipment insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for insulation products.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Project No. 99037/50 07210 BUILDING INSULATION- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior, below-grade dampproofing membrane from damage until backfill is completed.
Remove overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07160
Project No. 99037/50 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer, with particular attention at constriction joints.
D. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofing. Comply with details
shown and with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at
building expansion joints, if any.
E. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer.
F. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains
and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or
otherwise protecting adjoining work.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are
indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory
performance of work.
B. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces.
1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth
or other backfill and where space is enclosed on opposite side.
2. Exterior surface of inside wythe of double-wythe, exterior masonry walls above grade, to
prevent water-vapor penetration through the wall.
3. Where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Cold-Applied Asphalt Dampproofing: For exterior surfaces, provide either emulsified or cut-
back, asphalt dampproofing materials, at Contractors option. For interior surfaces, provide only
emulsified asphalt materials.
D. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as "reinforced," install lapped
course of glass fabric in first coat of dampproofing compound before it thickens.
E. Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) cant strip of bituminous grout at base
of vertical dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface.
F. Apply vertical dampproofing down walls from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over
top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. Extend
12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed
to view when the Project is completed.
3.3 COLD-APPLIED, ASPI IALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING
A. Semimastic Grade: Brush apply a coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 5 gal./100
sq. ft. (2 L/sq. m), to produce a uniform, dry-film thickness of not less than 30 mils (0.8 mm).
Project No. 99037/50 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and
warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing:
a. ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div.
b. Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Karnak Chemical Corporation.
d. Koppers Industries, Inc.
e. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application.
B. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: Asphalt-based emulsions recommended by the
manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Semimastic Grade: Emulsified asphalt mastic, prepared with mineral- colloid emulsifying
agents and containing fibers other than asbestos, complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III
or IV.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D 41, for asphalt-based dampproofing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with
recommendations of prime materials manufacturer.
B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer even though not shown.
Project No. 99037/50 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07160-BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOHNG
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials
comply with requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended
method of application, recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and
recommended protection course.
1. Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed bituminous
dampproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one
source and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
15 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work
have been completed.
Project No. 99037/50 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2 Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8
inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 nun) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for I-inch (25-mm) penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
I. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
3. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
I. Countertop Supports: Anchor frames securely by lag screws through sub-frames. Provide
removable closure panels secured with stainless steel screws and finishing washers equally spaced
from panel edges.
J. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate by blind nailing. Do not use face fastening,
unless covered by trim.
K. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime
coats were applied in shop.
1-. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 12
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
G. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, color, effect,
and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System OP-3: Water-reducible acrylic lacquer.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of colors available in finish system
specified.
4. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb(including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches Q mm in 2400 mm).
CI Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E. Applied Trim to Fire Rated Doors: Where indicated, provide face trim glued to fire-rated flush
wood doors to pattern and style shown.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces
less than 60 inches (1500 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Dill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base, if finished.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut for transparent-finished architectural woodwork
located in same area of building. -004*
2.14 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.15 SHOP FINISHING OF CASEWORK
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AV/1 Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
L Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section,
regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. The extent to which the final
finish is applied at fabrication shop is Contractor's option, except shop apply at least the prime
coat before delivery. .�•w,
D. General: Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as
specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for finishing opaque finished
architectural woodwork.
E. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
I. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate or backing paper.
F. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining,
and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
L Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System TR-4: Conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to
open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
a. Apply vinyl wash coat sealer after staining and before filling.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
_ 1. Provide Architects selections from manufacturers full range of colors and finishes in the
following categories:
a. Solid colors.
F. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
G. Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue or Medium-density fiberboard made with
exterior glue.
2.11 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-
surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architects selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes.
E. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives,
> sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
F. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
G. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.
2.12 WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species and Cut: Southern yellow pine beaded paneling.
2.13 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Reveal Dimension: 1 inch (25 mm.
-Aw4k.
E. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Any closed-grain hardwood.
F. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium-density overlay.
G. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match materials indicated for exposed surfaces.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber for transparent finish.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood for transparent finish.
H. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.9 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTER SUPPORTS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the
following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. ,
2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS.
3. Edges: HGS.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architects selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and
finishes in the following categories:
a. Solid colors.
2.10 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative
laminate countertops.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with WIC Section 16.
C. Grade Premium. .
D. I ligh-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: FIGS.
E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: ..�,
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
F. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.7 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame.
D. Reveal Dimension: 1 inch (25 mm).
E. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: White oak, rift sawn or cut or White ash, plain
sawn or sliced.
1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain horizontally for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed
panels.
2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
3. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.
F. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match species and cut indicated for exposed
surfaces.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed
surfaces.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, same species indicated for exposed surfaces.
G. Pro;ide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.8 WOOD CABINETS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 min)
Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
mm).
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible,
before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,
and fitting.
F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
G. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and in
GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Grade: Premium. ^'
C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
E. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
F. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
G. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut of transparent-finished architectural woodwork
located in same area of building.
1. Provide split species on trim that face areas with different wood species, matching each face
of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Grade: Premium.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusett,
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening.
D. Brass Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches(100 mm)long, 5/16.
E. Catches: Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9, B03013.
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.
G. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:
1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf(440 N).
H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BI-IMA A 156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base.
I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A 156.9.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion
sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the
referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Document existing trim, profiles and mouldings to be replicated.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
r
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.1 MATERIALS
Oak-
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn or cut or White ash, plain
sawn or sliced.
D. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
L Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
F. Clear Float Glass for Doors: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 6 mm thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative
laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
H. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Adhesive specified above for faces.
I. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a
precoated finish.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Corian; DuPont Polymers.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.
B. I lardware Standard: Comply with BHMA Al 56.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA
numbers or items referenced to this standard.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-4
AI
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program [labels] [certificate] indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions"Article.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with constructi_�n progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Project No. 90037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Product Data: For plywood, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic
laminate, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details half full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other
items installed in architectural woodwork.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated.
1. Plastic laminates.
2. Solid-surfacing materials.
E. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 nun)
long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
2. Wood-veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches (300 by
600 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as
specified.
3. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color,
pattern, and surface finish.
4. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches(150 mm)square.
5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06402- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Custom wood cabinets.
3. Plastic laminate panels.
4. Plastic laminate counter supports.
5. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
6. Wood paneling and wainscots.
7. Interior ornamental work.
8. Interior frames and jambs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors."
4. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors."
5. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for stock wood windows.
6. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing,
headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
Project No. 99037/50 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, I
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use
fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces
less than 36 inches (900 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8
inch in 96 inches(3 mm in 2400 mm).
F. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed.
G. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06401
Project No. 99037/50 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Grade: Premium.
Aw'"'''
D. Wood Species: Western red cedar or Ponderosa pine.
1. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm)
wide.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood
primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural wood-;,ork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with
concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance
of time substrates are to be built.
C. Before `installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish
at cuts.
Project No. 99037/50 06401 EXTERIOR ARC,HITEC,TURAL WOODWORK-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) AWN'
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
mm).
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant
coating suitable for exterior applications.
2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where shipping limitations require field assembly.
E. Wood Species: Western red cedar or Ponderosa pine.
1. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 min)
wide.
2.5 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AV/1 Section 700.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: Western red cedar or Ponderosa pine.
1. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 min)
wide.
2.6 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with WIC Section 9. •
Project No. 99037/50 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of
Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported
and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of
exterior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent
moisture content.
B. Nails: hot-dip galvanized, or stainless steel.
C. Screws: Brass or Bronze.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: 10 to 15 percent.
B. Document existing profiles, shapes and mouldings of existing components to be replicated.
Where salvaged components are indicated, inspect existing components for defects that may
impair performance and advise Architect of components that require repair or replacement.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
Project No. 99037/50 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Show details half size.
2. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and look
reinforcement specified in other Sections.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Source Limitations for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to
assume undivided responsibility for fabricating and installing woodwork specified in this Section.
D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified
finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Project No. 99037/50 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior ornamental work including the following:
a. Pediment heads.
b. Pilasters.
C. Balusters.
d. Columns.
2. Exterior frames and jambs.
3. Shop priming exterior woodwork.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing.
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for exterior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors."
4. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors."
5. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for stock wood windows.
6. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of exterior architectural woodwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of
exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
Project No. 99037/50 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
E. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's requirements.
3.6 STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION
A. Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to rough
carriages.
1. Closed Stringers: Cope wall stringers to fit tightly over treads and risers].
B. Railings: Secure wall rails to metal brackets. Fasten railings to steel bar stock at metal stairs with
countersunk-head wood screws. Assemble railings at goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail
bolts and glue.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06200
'`
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and
risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest
treads and risers within each flight. Glue-nail treads to risers and stringers.
5. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and
miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across
joints, where necessary for alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Prime all four edges prior to installe"on. Install each course of siding
with tight joints with tongue up. Stagger scarfed end joints. Blind nail at each stud. Set nails by
hand to prevent splitting. Align joints with existing siding and course with heads of window
openings.
1. Apply battens and corner trim as indicated.
2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by countersinking and filling, by placing in
grooves of siding pattern, or by concealing with applied trim or battens as detailed.
B. Bevel Siding: Install starter strip for first course of bevel siding, Plan installation using lengths as
long as practicle with butt ends occuring over framing or blocking. Weave new siding with
existing, match coursing.
1. Nail through only one thickness of siding to allow for expansion.
2. Install continuous metal flashing at heads of doors and windows.
C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding
manufacturer.
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished
work:
1. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 min).
2. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds.
3. Wood board paneling.
C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius
and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm)or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to
required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section"Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
L Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
AOW recommended by manufacturer.
i
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Kiln-dried finished
lumber(S4S)of the following species and grades:
1. Grade [D Select (Quality), No. 1 Common or Premium Idaho white, lodgepole,
ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or WV./PA.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): [Clear] [Grade A finish[,
kiln-dried, white oak finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color with existing
trim.
C. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), solid lumber, of the following
species and grades:
1. Grade 1 Common spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.5 STAIRS AND RAILINGS
A. Interior Stairs:
1. Treads: 3/4-inch underlayment plywood with integral wood nosing to receive resilient
flooring.
2. Risers: 3/4-inch(19-mm)underlayment plywood to recieve resilient flooring.
3. Finished Stringers: 3/4-inch (19-mm) finish boards as specified above for interior lumber
trim for opaque finish.
B. Interior Railings: Clear, kiln-dried hard maple of pattern indicated, solid.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide finish nails of the following materials, in
sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer:
1. Hot-dip galvanized steel.
B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
where possible.
1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity(i.e. bath and toilet
rooms), provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
C. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general
carpentry use.
D. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing materials installed in finish carpentry.
1:. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required
for sealing siding work.
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp
and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
2.2 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Painted Applications: Kiln-dried, solid lumber with surfaced (smooth) face,
provide one of the following species and grade:
1. Grade A, western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Grade D Select (Quality), No.1 Common or Premium grade eastern white pine, eastern
hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or
WWPA.
B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-
dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4.
1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole,
ponderosa,or sugar pine.
2. Drip-Cap Pattern: WM 197, 11/16 by 1.5/8 inches (17 by 41 mm).
3. Bed-Mold Pattern: WM 75, 9/16 by 1-5/8 inches(14 by 41 mm).
4. Screen-Bead Pattern: WM 144, 1/4 by 3/4 inch(6 by 19 mm).
2.3 SIDING
A. Lumber Siding: Kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20.
1. Bevel Siding: S1S2E, actual overall dimensions of 5-1/2 by 11/16 inch (140 by 17 mm),
measured on the face and thick edge at 19 percent moisture content.
2. Grade A,western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA
3. Tongue and Groove Siding: Actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 3-7/8 by 3/4
inch (124 by 19mm), measured at 15 percent moisture content.
4. Grade D Select (Quality), No. I Common or Premium eastern white pine, eastern
hemlock-balsam fir-tamarack, eastern spruce, or white woods; NFLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
5. Beaded Soffit:
24 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and
colors.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer.
B. Standards: Install finish carpentry according to quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork
Institute (AWI), "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" 7' Edition.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood,
and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary
coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during
the remainder of the construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and
warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
1.8 WARRANTY
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
L 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Exterior lumber siding.
3. Exterior wood bevel siding.
4. Exterior wood shingles.
5. Interior standing and running trim for field-painted finish.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 6 Section"Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for exterior woodwork not specified
in this Section.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified
in this Section.
4. Division 9 Section"Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NHIA-National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SCMA-Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association.
5. SPIB -Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
6. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
7. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 St JBMITTAI S
OOW
Project No. 99037/50 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY- 1
nn�wwmwi�w
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus"provisions in above-referenced guide.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
2. Sheathing:
a. Nail or staple to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm)apart at edges and ends.
3. Underlayment:
a. Nail or staple to subflooring.
b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.
C. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring just before
installing flooring.
4. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
3.10 BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION
A. Apply building paper horizontally with 3-inch (75-mm) overlap and 6-inch (150-mm) end lap;
fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with fl-
inch (102-mm)overlap.
END OF SECTION 06100
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY- 13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
L Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-64-mm actual-)
size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists.
2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturers written instructions.
3.7 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements
specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to
rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first
joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- (19-by-
184-mm actual-) size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spaced 48
inches (1200 mm) o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists.
B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form
headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers.
Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use
metal ridge hangers.
1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same
thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full
bearing against valley rafters.
2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular
rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip
rafter.
C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any.
3.8 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal-(38-by-286-mm actual-)size, minimum.
2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-1/2 inches
(89 mm)of effective depth.
3. Stringer Spacing: At least 3 stringers for each 36-inch (914-mm) clear width of stair.
B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads
and risers and no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and
risers within each flight.
3.9 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALIATION
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY- 12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
(2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same
width as wall or partitions.
C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling
line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely
fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thick lumber of same width as framing
members.
D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
1. Provide double-jamb studs with headers as noted, but not less than 6-inch nominal (89-mm
actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 8-inch nominal (140-
mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 10-inch
nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000 mm) in
width.
3.6 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry.
Attach floor joists as follows:
" 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors.
2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if
not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.
B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and
trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm).
C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends.
Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from
top or bottom.
D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of
joists unless nailed to header or band.
E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches
(102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal
(38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist over supports.
F. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings.
G. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to
depth of studs above.
H. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at mid-span or intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c.,
between joists.
J
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY- 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for
tolerance of finish work.
I. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-)
size furring horizontally or perpendicular to framing at 24 inches (6 10 mm) o.c.
C. Furring to Gypsum Board with Insulation Infill: Install 2-by-2-inch nominal-(38-by-38-mm actual-
) size furring vertically at 600 mm o.c.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) dimension lumber on edge ;
are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d (100-mm) nails spaced not less than 32 inches
(812 mm) o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge.
L For continuous members, stagger end joints at quarter points between supports.
3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and
narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate
may be used for nwi-load-bearing partitions. Anchor [or nail] plates to supporting construction,
unless otherwise indicated.
L For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-) or 2-by-4-inch
nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-)] size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm)]400 mm o.c.,
as indicated.
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size
wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as
indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGIi CARPENTRY- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-0 1 and
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both
adhesive and panel manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
_1 1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
2. Appendix C, Recommended Fastening Schedule, 780 CMR, Massachusetts State Building
Code.
E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill
holes with wood filler.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work.
Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUG1-I CARPENTRY-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z 180)coating designation.
C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)
wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
1. Thickness: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm).
D. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)
wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord.
1. Thickness: 0.050 inch 0.3 mm).
E. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with
tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
1. Strap Width: 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Thickness: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm).
F. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, length to suit joist size and
spacing.
G. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25
HIM) above base and with 2-inch- (50-mm-) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm)
thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm)thick.
H. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.
1. Width: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Thickness: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm).
3. Length: 24 inches (600 mm).
I. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of
top plates, and side of stud below.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Building Wrap: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 30
asphalt felt), unperforated.
B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer;
1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.9 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in
thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm)thick, painted black.
2.10 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and
reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.11 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and
size indicated, and as follows:
1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in
effect for Project.
2 Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
` manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY- 7
loll oil
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 800 MPa).
B. Parallel-Strand Lumber: A composite of wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to
member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-
mm actual-) depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi(13 800 MPa).
C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units complying with APA PRI-400; depths and performance ratings
not less than those indicated.
1. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, Exposure 1.
2, Structural Capacities: Establish and monitor structural capacities according; to
ASTM D 5055.
3. Trademark: Factory mark I-joists with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist
class, span ratings, mill identification, and I-joist compliance with APA standard.
2.7 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm)}.
B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm).
2.8 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Structural I single-floor
panels.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 oc.
2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch (18.3 ruin).
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
B. Underlayment, General Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5
mm) over board or uneven subfloors.
C. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, Exterior, CC Plugged or Exposure 1
underlayment with fully sanded face.
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NELMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
D. Minimum requirements for Joists& Rafters Listed Above: Any species and grade with a modulus
of elasticity of at least 1,200,000 psi(8280 MPa) and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least
1200 psi (8.3 Mpa) for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and 12-inch nominal (286-mm
actual)width for single-member use.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content and [any of[ the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NELMA,
NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to
member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2850 psi (19.7 MPa) for 12-inch nominal-
(286-mm actual-) depth members.
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction
Guide: Residential& Commercial."
4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not
in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the
following:
a. Chromated copper arsenate(CCA).
b. Ammoniacal copper citrate(CC).
C. Oxine copper(copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber. Do
not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Partition Framing: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. 1 lem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of
the following species:
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROi JGH CARPENTRY-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Superior Wood Systems, Inc.
e. Trus Joist MacMillan.
4. Building Paper:
a. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division.
b. Owens Corning Corp.
C. GAF Materials Corp.
5. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
C. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2,
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show
compliance with building code in effect for Project.
I. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
C. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. ""
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Laminated-Vei.,er Lumber:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Trus Joist MacMillan.
2. Parallel-Strand Lumber:
a. Trus Joist MacMillan.
3. Prefabricated Wood I-Joists:
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood blocking and nailers.
4. Utility shelving.
5. Wood furring and grounds.
6. Sheathing.
7. Subflooring and underlayment.
8. Plywood backing panels.
9. Building wrap.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view
and not specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Project No. 99037/50 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY, 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
3.2 INSTALLING STEEL RAILINGS, HANDRAILS AND BRACKETS
A. Adjust handrails and railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb
posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends
and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building
construction as follows:
1. I Jse Blum, Type 382, bracket for pipe rails with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
2. Provide Blum, Type 381, bracket for wall mounted wood railings.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
END OF SECTION 05511
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and
overstressing of substrate.
I. For nongalvanized handrails and railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete
construction.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM'S "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed products:
1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of metal stair components, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. l," for shop painting. Primer need
not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established
lines and levels and free frorn rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to wc!d plates cast into concrete,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on side of subtreads to be concealed by
concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. '"
4. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads.
Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with smooth soffits.
2.7 STEEL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and
anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1. Configuration: 1x3/16-inch- (25x5-mm-) flat bar top rail, 2-inch- (50-mm-) square newel
posts, and 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)square pickets spaced not more than 4 inches (101 mm) clear
attached to stringers. Provide newel caps of pressed steel, as shown.
2. Configuration: 1-5/8-inch (41-mm) OD rails at walls and wood framed stairs. Space
brackets not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) O.C.
B. Interconnect members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of tube to
which end is joined, and weld all around. `
i
C. Form changes in direction of handrails and rails as follows:
1. By bending.
2. By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
3. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved.
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for
each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
E. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of
returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch(6 nun) or less.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, Ranges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting railings and for attaching to other work.
Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.
I. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.
H. fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Shop Assembly: Preassemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
F. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
G. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
I. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural-steel channels, plates, or a combination of both, as
indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural-steel
channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt or weld headers to
stringers; bolt or weld framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and
join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
B. Metal Risers, Subtread Pans, and Subplatforms: Form to configurations shown from steel sheet
of thickness necessary to support indicated loads, but not less than 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm).
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS -5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel,ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593
(ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing
no asbestos fibers or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, handrails, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets,
bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on
supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
2 tJse connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain. Aw
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS -4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 COORDINATION
AOW
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, and other
imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Do not use steel sheet with variations in
flatness:,exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
F. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M;
or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless another grade is required by
design loads.
G. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M;
or st-ictural quality, complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 30, unless another grade is
required by design loads.
H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded:
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,
grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts,ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B 18.6.7M).
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m) applied horizontally and concurrently with
uniform load of 100 lbf/ft. (1460 N/m) applied vertically downward.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied
as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf(890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. (730 N/m) applied in any direction.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 Ibf
(890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. in) at any point in system, including panels,
intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area.
a. Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in
determining stress on guards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal stairs. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal stairs and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Sections.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for metal stairs specified in this Section to be fabricated and
installed by the same firm.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
Steel", and AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05511 -METAL STAIRS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fabricated steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
2. Ornamental steel-framed stairs.
3. Handrails and railings attached to metal stairs.
4. Handrails attached to walls adjacent to wood or metal stairs.
5. Brackets for wood railings attached to walls adjacent to wood or metal stairs
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the following structural
loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including
anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component of
metal stairs.
1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100
lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 lbf(1.33 kN) on an area of 4 sq.
in. (25.8 sq. cm),whichever produces the greater stress.
2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above in
addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads.
3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4
mm), whichever is less.
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of
withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress
of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections:
1. Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf 0330 N) applied at any point and in any direction.
Project No. 99037/50 05511 METAL STAIRS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if
any.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.
1. Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders are installed and
leveled.
3.4 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS,AND THRESHOLDS
A. Install with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Center nosings on tread widths.
C. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level
with tread surfaces.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPCTA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
APk
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and "
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately toger'.er to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
_ roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent ,M*
surface.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
2. Amstep Products.
3. Safe-T-Metal Co.
4. Wooster Products Inc.
2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
Oak exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized
finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop
painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges.
2.14 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
AOW
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
-� B. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.
C. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches (32 min) wide by 1/4 inch (6 min) thick
by 8 inches (200 mm) long at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
2. Drill girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches
(600 mm) o.c.
E. fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel
baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection
bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12-mm) baseplates with four 5/8-inch (16-
mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch(6-mm)top plates.
2.11 EXTRUDED NOSINGS AND TREADS
A. Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit
openings or conditions. Provide extruded-aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of
aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder.
1. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.
B. Configurations: Provide units in the following configurations, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Nosings: Units, 3 inches (75 mm)wide, for casting into concrete steps.
C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard
with manufacturer.
D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1'. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
.4owk
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS- 6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
_ F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear
span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. (jeneral: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as
necessary to complete the Work.
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
G, Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
1-1, Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group I or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593
(ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M).
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
2.6 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (I mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
Surface.
1:. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor
of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M)
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.3 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
2.4 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
00"k provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying
with SSPC-Paint 20.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing
no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying wit:i ASTM D 1187.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type,grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM I. 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts,ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME 818.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
E. Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1 (ASME 818.2.3.8M).
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B 18.6.1.
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as °^
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
L6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items
to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS- 2
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
2. Loose steel lintels.
3. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction.
4. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction.
5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
6. Extruded nosings and treads.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs with metal pan, metal plate, or
-r grating treads.
2. Division 5 Section"Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings.
3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors and other rough
hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Extruded nosings and treads.
2. Paint products.
3. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
Plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Project No. 99037/50 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architects approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable maskin(;agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water bef, ce applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
S. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in B1A Technical
Notes No. 20, us'ng job-mixed detergent solution.
3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At
completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units,waste
- mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is
placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry
waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches(450 mm) of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
-00.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 18
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing
1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal
flashing termination.
8. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes.
2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down
at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related constr—tion where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to
maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 17
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.12 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for
brick-size units and 24 inches (6 10 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
1. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam
units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast
lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until
cured.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.13 FIASI ZING, WEEP HOLES,AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and
cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
C. Install flashing as follows:
1. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of
outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of [4 inches (100
mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)], and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of the
interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is
concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up
approximately 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up
face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm), and behind air-infiltration barrier or building_
paper.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn
flashing up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal tap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
5. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn
flashing down to form a drip.
6. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch (13
min) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 16
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other
rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints
and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but riot more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fasten anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated.
2. Insert anchor sections in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each
stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.
3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 inches (50 mm) of air space
between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24
inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m)
of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around the perimeter.
6. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 24
inches (610) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m)
of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related
items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless
provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build in joint fillers where indicated.
2. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of
sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and
clear of mortar.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 15
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.6 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
-amok
A. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together.
B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "I"
units as well as masonry bonding.
C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units.
3.7 CAVITIES
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints
facing cavities flush.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
B. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."
3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of
longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of
walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm)elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 min) o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm)beyond openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections.
Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.9 ANCI IORING MASONRY TO STRUCTiJRAL MEMBERS
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 14
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses
above and below.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half
running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry
units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections
of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal
lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do riot deeply furrow bed joints or
slush head joints.
C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and
similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting; for soiled stone surfaces,
clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with
clear water.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
1:. Cut joints {lush on interior faces of masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 13
min In I I
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use
full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing,
unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut
edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
I. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2
inch (12 mm) maximum.
C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch(12 mm) maximum.
E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed-
joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch (3 nun). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8
inch (3 mm).
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALIS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other
locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch(100-min) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and
pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143.
F. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's
directions.
2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control
testing indicated below:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
B. Brick Tests: For salvaged brick, units will be tested according to ASTM C 67.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of
the Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
A^
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. '''
B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.187-
inch (4.8-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
2.12 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. lob-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium
polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of
water.
2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 and BIA M 1, Proportion and Property
Specification.
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement,and lime.
2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type M.
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type N.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:
1. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.
D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates combined
with selected cementitious materials.
I. Mix to match color selected by Architect.
1-. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Fabricate metal drip edges from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inches (75
ew mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with a hemmed outer edge bent down
30 degrees.
4. Fabricate metal flashing terminations from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3
inches (75 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend
metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and then down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to
form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
B. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use
metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use [one of] the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of [5-
oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m)] [7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m)] sheet copper bonded with asphalt
between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's stanu,rd product consisting of 15-oz./sq.
ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m)] [7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m)] sheet copper coated with flexible asphalt. Use
only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: Type compatible with type of flashing used.
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Copper-Laminated Flashing:
a. Copper Fabric Flashing;Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. Copper Fabric; AFCO Products, Inc.
C. H& B C Fab Flashing; Hohmann& Barnard, Inc.
d. Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper; Phoenix Building Products.
e. Copper Fabric Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
f. Copper Fabric Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
g. York Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc.
2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing:
a. Cop-R-Cote;Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. Cop-A-Cote;AFCO Products, Inc.
C. 1-I & B C-Coat Flashing; I lolimann & Barnard, Inc.
d. Type ACC-Asphalt Bituminous Coated; Phoenix Building Products.
C, Coated Copper Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
f. Coated Copper Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
g. Copperseal;York Manufacturing, Inc.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.8 ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO CONCRETE
A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist
tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
L. Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- (1.35-mm-) thick, steel
sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry
face, made from 0.1875-inch-(4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.
B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from
0.0336-inch (0.85-mm),galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-
dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the
following configurations:
L Headed bolts.
2. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.
D. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure,
load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Type: Chemical anchors.
2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition(mild).
3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to four times the loads imposed.
4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed.
2.10 l;Iv113EDDED FIASI ZING MATERIAI 5
A. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in
"SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and below:
I. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. in) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully
concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick
elsewhere.
2. fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from sheet metal indicated
above and with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an
integral mortar bond.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
4. Colored Masonry Cement:
a. Magnolia Masonry Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Centurion Colorbond; Lafarge Corporation.
C. Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
5. Mortar Pigments:
a. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.
2.5 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including
Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60(Grade 400).
2.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:
L Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm)diameter.
4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units
where indicated.
B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and
cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
C. For multiwythe masonry, provide types as follows:
1. Ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
and 1 side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in
width, plus 1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches(100 mm) or less in width.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that
comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.
C. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.
D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 STONE TRIM UNITS
A. Bluestone caps:
B. Cut stone accurately to shape and dimensions indicated, with exposed faces dressed true, and
with cleft edges at right angles to face.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type, I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
B. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
I. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce the color
indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations.
2. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to produce
required mortar color.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use
aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm)sieve.
1. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
l:. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
G. Water: Potable.
11. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; I lolnam, Inc.
C. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.
d. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
2. Mortar Cement:
a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
b. I-afarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation.
3. Colored Mortar Cement:
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500 psi(17.3 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
4. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:
a. Modular: 3-5/8 inches (92 trim)wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches
(194 mm) long.
5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required.
B. HOPKINS HOUSE
1. Use units salvaged from demolition operations, subject to pre-construction testing.
2. Where units tests demonstrate inadequate strength, provide new face brick. Architect will
issue proposal request for pricing if existing brick is not satisfactory.
3. See Alternates for providing new brick as part of base contract.
C. WESLEY HOUSE:
1. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW,Type FBX, and as follows:
2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500 psi(20.7 MPa).
3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. (20 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when
tested per ASTM C 67.
4. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick,
shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable
difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m).
5. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:
a. Standard: 3.1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 film) high
by 8 inches(203 mm) long.
6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Color and Texture: Full-range red, sand molded.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 1 NIT MASONRY ASSEMBI-IES-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
days after completing cleaning.
E. Ilot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg 1, (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a
wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than
48 inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of
spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding,
and other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
L Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi(13.1 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
3. Provide. Type I, moisture-controlled units.
4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:
a. 4 inches (102 mm) nominal; 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) actual.
b. 6 inches (152 mm) nominal; 5-5/8 inches (143 mm) actual.
C. 8 inches (203 min) nominal; 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) actual.
d. 10 inches (254 mm) nominal; 9-5/8 inches (244 mm) actual.
5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units
made with gap-graded aggregates.
b. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture snatching the range
represented by Architect's sample.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become
wet, do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of
installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of
delivery.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe
and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread
on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end o1 each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 3
now
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
I. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Each type of masonry unit required.
a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within
specified tolerances.
b. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive
strength of masonry units.
2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer,
brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
3. lack material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
4. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
5. Fach type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.
I Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used
to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component
and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
following Preconstruction testing:
L Cla}, Masonry Unit Test: For salvaged clay mason unit indicated �,,
g > masonry , per ASTM C 67.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
1 Concrete brick.
3. Building(common)brick.
4. Stone trim units.
5. Mortar and grout.
6. Reinforcing steel.
7. Masonry joint reinforcement.
8. Ties and anchors.
9. Embedded flashing.
10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section Unit Pavers" for exterior unit masonry paving.
2. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of
backup wythes of cavity walls.
3. Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural fratne, installed
under Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications."
D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished tinder Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
Project No. 99037/50 04810 UNIT ;MASONRY ASSEMBLIES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
END OF SECTION 03300
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE- 18
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173,
volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each
composite sample.
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mix.
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days
and two at 28 days.
a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in-place concrete.
D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-
strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa).
E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
both 7-and 28-day tests.
F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test
results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have
not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other
methods as directed by Architect.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- 17
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance
all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete
except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished
concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architects approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architects approval.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling
and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
13. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM,C: 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix
exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)
or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACID CONCRETE'- 16
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.14 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least two months. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces
of joint clean and dry.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architects approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls,
air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and
other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch(13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- 15
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. ...
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete
surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in
ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
11. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. in x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturers written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,
and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening
forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination
of the following methods:
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination
of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Continuous water-fog spray.
b. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
a. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor
coverings.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE'- 14
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat
float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and
slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane
roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or
to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage
membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to
ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum
local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled
freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete
Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green
and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE- 13
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mix constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on
the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 3058 and as
follows,when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32
deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,
veneer plaster, or painting.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISI IING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.IR for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. _00%k.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- 12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7
Section"Joint Sealants," are indicated.
2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints
where indicated.
1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
3.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly
pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless
approved by Architect.
C. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.
D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed
on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot
be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic,
to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 3098.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
verticalk, at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm)
into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
I. Shop-or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS D1.4,where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoinir; sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. Alwk
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms
with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into
concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints
in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
-partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-(3-mm-)wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.
Amok
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are
maintained.
B. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight
of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or
laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.
D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design,
installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material,
moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 min)
or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm).
3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
Project No. 9 9037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete
structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,
and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms
for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations
and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use
strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
G. Do not chamfer corners or edges of concrete.
H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-
wall (lashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at
lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for corrosion protection of steel
reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt, saltwater, brackish
water, seawater, or spray from these sources.
H. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete
at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5
percent, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch-(19-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size.
I. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors and suspended slabs. Do not allow
entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent.
J. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mix, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd. (29.7 kg/cu. m).
K. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturers recommended rate, but
not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m).
2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice."
2.11 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and
ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least one and
one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any
dart of batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. m).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, .
Class A.
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
a. Klear-Kote Cure-Sealer-I4ardener, 30 percent solids; Burke Group, LLC(The).
b. UV Safe Seal; Lambert Corporation.
C. Lumiseal WB Plus; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Vocomp-30; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
e. Metcure 30; Metalcrete Indus-Ties.
f. Vexcon Starseal 1315; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.
2.8 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial
mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for
the laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3000 psi(20.7 MPa).
2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm).
D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa).
2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 mm).
E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of
Cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements.
1:. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water
permeability.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for
use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116,Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches(13 to 38 mm) long.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Fibrillated Fibers:
a. Fibrasol F;Axim Concrete Technologies.
b. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.
C. Forta; Forta Corporation.
d. Grace Fibers; W. R. Grace& Co., Construction Products Div.
2. Monofilament Fibers:
a. Fibrasol IIP;Axim Concrete Technologies.
b. Fibermix Stealth; Fibermesh, Div. of Synthetic Industries.
C. Forta Mono; Forta Corporation.
d. Grace MicroFiber; W. R. Grace &Co., Construction Products Div.
C. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet,
ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils(0.25 mm)thick:
1. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet;
7.8 mils(0.18 mm)thick.
D. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-
mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; meeting deleterious substance
limits&ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT „A„k
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed.
B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, assembled with clips.
1. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed bars.
C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized.
D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's
"Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced
concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true ,
to length with ends square and free of burrs.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
B. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (SM),slag-modified portland cement.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:
L Class: Severe weathering region, but not less than 3S.
2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than
18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less
than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and less
than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50(0.3 mm).
D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
1. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
l:. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4,, 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to
ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and
as follows:
a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete
loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form
ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spatting of
concrete on removal.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Admixtures.
4. Waterstops.
5. Curing materials.
6. Floor and slab treatments.
7. Bonding agents.
8. Vapor retarders.
9. Joint-filler strips.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and
shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification program.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the
same manufacturer.
I'. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-
Reinforcing Steel."
G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." AOW*.
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PIACF CONCRETE'- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 2 Section"Cement Concrete Pavement' for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica
fume.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of
materials, project conditions,weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. -Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
wl-
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared
according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material,
grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete
reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:
ROW
Project No. 99037/50 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- 1
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Plant Bed Preparation
1. Excavate plant pits to 12" for shrubs and 8" for groundcover and width
indicated on Drawings.
2. Do not use material excavated from pits as backfill. Dispose of excavated
material off-site.
3. Scarify subgrade surface to blend with soil mix. Then backfill plant beds
with soil mix type indicated on Drawings. Adequately overfill beds so that
after full natural settlement finish grades will be at levels and profiles
indicated on Drawings. Do not use mechanical compaction.
4. Amend bed areas with following amendment treatments where indicated on
Drawings, incorporating materials 4" deep:
Commercial fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 sf
Natural organic fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 sf
Peatmoss 2" loose layer
5. Spread 2"—3" mulch over entire bed areas.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect fine graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair, re-shape and re-establish finished grades where areas settle, erode, are
disturbed and damaged.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean topsoiled areas of debris, making them suitable for grass and planting work
prior to acceptance by Architect.
B. Remove trash and debris from site and dispose of it legally. Do not dispose of
rocks, stones, boulders, vegetative materials, trash or other debris in existing
wooded or shrub areas.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -8
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Recess finish grade at edges of paving, walkways and tops of curbs 1" to
accept sod and allow for growth and build up of grass.
D. Rake surfaces clean of debris and stones 1" or larger in any dimension.
E. Compact topsoiled areas with approved roller weighing approximately 500 lbs.
Regrade to eliminate bumps and depressions until satisfactory finish grade is
obtained.
F. Do work around existing trees and shrubs as required under Section 02110 - Tree
and Plant Protection.
G. Stockpile and spread excess topsoil not required for work in locations and to
depths and grades determined by Architect.
3.04 TOPSOIL MIXTURES FOR SHRUB BEDS
A. Do mixing on site by following method unless otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Spread out topsoil and remove rocks and debris.
2. Calculate amount of each required additive or amendment for amount of
topsoil spread.
3. Spread each additive or amendment over top of topsoil uniformly. Spread
large quantity amendments one at a time and mix. Mix small quantity
amendments together before spreading to assure even distribution.
4. Use rotary tiller tractor attachment to chop in amendments. Mix materials
thoroughly.
B. Make up following types of planting mixtures using materials and proportions as
follows:
1. Topsoil Mixture (general planting):
3 parts topsoil with additive required to bring pH to 5.5-6.5 range.
1 part loose peatmoss.
1 part sand with 5 lbs. of superphosphate/cubic yard of mixture.
Ow
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -7
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine proposed areas to be topsoiled and conditions of installation. Do not start
topsoiling work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Examine areas to be topsoiled with Architect and identify poorly draining
subgrades for corrective preparatory work. Include both naturally occurring areas
and areas which may have been formerly compacted, underlain former paved
areas, and compacted by construction operations and activities.
3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. In areas where subgrade is poorly draining scarify subgrade 12" deep with vibrator
plow or other methods approved by the Architect.
B. Harrow or otherwise loosen and roughen subgrade surfaces to depth of 3" or as
otherwise approved by Architect to provide bonding key for topsoil.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TOPSOIL FOR LAWN
A. Distribute, uniformly spread topsoil and obtain minimum depths after settlement in
areas to be seeded, sodded or sprigged with grass and not otherwise planted,
surfaced or paved as indicated on Drawings.
B. While spreading topsoil, remove excessive amounts of large clods, hard lumps,
rocks, roots, sticks, vegetative matter and other debris.
C. Fine grade topsoiled areas:
1: Shape and rake surfaces to lines, finish grades and thickness required
providing a smooth, uniform surface with an uninterrupted drainage pattern
free of hollows and pockets.
2. Fill, trim, blend and feather proposed grades to meet surrounding existing
terrain, paving, curb, edge and building base conditions in smooth transition
without abrupt level changes.
3. Pitch surfaces for positive drainage, shedding runoff in direction of drainage
courses or drain structures. Ensure that surfaces pitch away from buildings
minimum 2% for 20' unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -6
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
rates of application are increased proportionately on basis of quantities
passing 100 mesh sieve.
C. Natural Organic Fertilizer: "Milorganite", by Sewerage Commission, Milwaukee,
Wisconsin, or approved equivalent having an analysis as follows:
Total Nitrogen(N)-6.5% water insoluble nitrogen 6.0%
Available Phosphoric Acid (P205) 3.0%
Soluble Potash(K20) 0.0%
Iron (Fe) 3.0%
D. Commercial Fertilizer: Having following minimum guaranteed composition by
weight: nitrogen 5% (50% organic), available Phosphoric Acid (P205) 10%,
Soluble Potash (K20) 5%, unless soil tests indicate need for different composition
as determined by Architect. Elements becoming available according to methods
adopted by Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. By Agway or approved
equivalent.
E. Superphosphate: Composed of finely ground phosphate rock commonly used for
agricultural purposes. Containing not less than 18%available phosphoric acid. By
Agway or approved equivalent.
F. Peat Moss: Domestic product consisting of partially decomposed vegetable matter
of natural occurrence from sphagnum sources. Brown in color, clean, low in
content of mineral and woody material, mildly acid, shredded and free from stones,
roots and twigs.
G. Sand: Clean, course, ungraded, meeting ASTM C33 requirements for concrete
sand.
H. Bark Mulch: Shredded cedar bark with fibrous texture and uniform dark brown
color. Partially decomposed, of a consistency so that not more than 25%will pass
through a 1/2" sieve with a 1 1/2" maximum size, having an organic content of not
less than 90%, with white wood content not exceeding 8%. "Cedar Scape"
Decorative Shredded Cedar Bark by Atlantic Forest Products, Edenton,N.C.
27932 or approved equivalent.
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -5
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Quality:
a. One hundred percent by weight will pass 1" mesh sieve. In material
passing 1/4" mesh sieve there will not be less than 20% or more than
65%passing No. 200 mesh sieve as determined by wash test made in
accordance with standard test ASTM D1140.
b. Topsoil will contain not less than 4% nor more than 20% organic
matter in portion of sample which passes 1/4" mesh sieve when
determined by wet combustion method on sample dried at 1050C.
C. Topsoil will have true range of pH values from 7.0 - 5.5.
2. Source will be single origin with supply of sufficient size to meet complete
project needs and one of the following:
a. Areas from which no topsoil has been previously taken and which
possesses such uniformity as to offer assurance to the Architect that
product will be homogeneous and will meet specified requirements.
b. Area which is or has been in cultivation within past ten years and is
producing or has produced fair to good yield of farm crops within
unusual fertilization, or area which would be readily cultivable for
farm crop, and is supplied with good normal drainage.
C. Approved topsoil supplier or producer of manufactured, soil-based
growing medium with a stockpile of material uniformly treated and of
consistent nature meeting required characteristics and qualities.
3. Preparation: After topsoil source has been approved, grub out and remove
any brush and cut and remove any weeds in area or stockpile. Where there
are substantial number of objectionable weeds, strip and remove top 1" of
soil before any topsoil is taken.
B. Additives for pH Correction:
1. Aluminum Sulfate or powdered sulfur commercial grade.
2. Ground limestone: Dolomitic, not less than 85% total carbonates and
magnesium, ground so that 50%passes 100 mesh sieve and 90% passes 20
mesh sieve. Coarser material shall be acceptable provided that specified
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -4
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work under this Section closely with work of other trades wherever
such work affects or is affected by the work included herein.
B. Divide site into logical work parcels scheduling and completing work in each area
in continuous operation so that grass and planting work can follow expeditiously.
C. Fine grading shall be accepted by Architect prior to seeding, sodding, sprigging
and planting.
D. Do not work with soggy, muddy or frozen topsoil or install topsoil during rain or
on subgrades which are muddy, under water or frozen.
E. Topsoil:
1. Haul and spread existing topsoil from on-site stockpile.
2. Provide new topsoil from off-site source if required to complete work.
3. Provide screened existing or new topsoil for topsoil mixes under the work of
Section 02950, Planting, as required to completed that work.
4. Any excess existing topsoil will remain property of Owner.
F. Prepare shrub beds and soil mixtures in coordination with Owner's planting
schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. New Topsoil: Imported, fertile, friable material of loamy character; of uniform
grade without admixture of subsoil material; reasonably free from clods, stiff clay,
hardpan, large stones, plants, roots, sticks, glass, waste building materials, rubbish,
debris and other deleterious or objectionable materials.
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Owner will approve, and reserves right to inspect, source of new topsoil.
Inspection of new topsoil source will not affect right of rejection on delivery or
during progress of work of topsoil that does not meet quality and other material
requirements, nor relieve Contractor of responsibility for requirements.
C. Testing:
1. Provide and pay for materials testing by recognized, independent testing
service approved by Owner.
2. Take representative samples for testing from materials as they are delivered
as follows: Each 100 cy.
3. Topsoil: Provide testing for analysis data indicated:
a. Topsoil chemical tests including texture, nitrate nitrogen, ammonium
nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium, acidity-alkalinity
test and organic constituents analysis.
b. Each analysis shall be accompanied by service's recommendations for
fertilizer and bringing topsoil to true range of pH values listed below for
each of following uses:
1. Lawns and Grasses -pH 6.0 - 6.8
2. General Ornamentals - pH 5.5 - 6.5
3. Ericaceous Ornamentals - pH 4.5 - 5.5
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Deliver submittals to Architect and obtain his approval prior to
ordering materials or beginning work or as otherwise required. Time delivery to
allow reasonable review period and prevent delays.
A. Submit name and location of proposed supply source of new topsoil with certified
analysis by recognized, independent testing service including tests for quality
requirements in art. 2.01, para. A., subpara. 1. of proposed topsoil.
B. Submit test reports for topsoil.
C. Submit literature and samples as required for soil amendments.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Keep topsoil from being mixed
with subsoil, subgrade materials, other stockpiled materials, waste materials, „
debris and other contaminants.
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02920 - TOPSOIL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Preparation of subgrade in areas to receive topsoil.
2. Preparation of soil mixtures and beds for shrubs and groundcover, including
mulch.
3. Providing new topsoil, if required.
4. Testing topsoil from off-site.
5. Hauling and spreading existing topsoil.
6. Delivering and spreading new topsoil, if required.
7. Fine grading.
Note: Planting of lawn, trees, shrubs and groundcovers is to be by Owner.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Tree and Plant Protection: Section 02110.
B. Earthwork: Section 02300.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work of this Section shall be performed by approved Landscape Firm with good
reputation, successful record over past 5 years on projects of similar size and
complexity and which maintains regular force of experienced workmen skilled in
work of this Section.
AW
Project No. 99037/50 02920 TOPSOIL -1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts 100ftk
END OF SECTION 02780
Project No. 99037/50 02780 UNIT PAVERS-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
ROW Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
B. Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch-(19-mm-) deep control bars approximately
11 feet (3.3 m) apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust
bars to subgrades required for accurate setting of paving units to finished grades indicated.
C. Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material
between control bars. Strike setting bed smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm)
thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking board. After
each panel is completed, advance first control bar to next position in readiness for striking
adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-control bars.
1. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm) while still hot.
Adjust thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished grades
indicated.
2. Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling.
If troweled on, use trowel with serrations not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Proceed with
setting of paving units only after adhesive is dry to the touch.
D. Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform
top surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can stand. Advance
protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to continued
movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting alignment of
pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll paving with
power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface from several days of hot weather.
E. Set stone pavers in hand tamped stone dust base layer flush with brick pavers.
F. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints with sand by sweeping over
paved surface until joints are filled.
3.5 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING,AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and
install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of
replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar or
grout. Point up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared
for sealant application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
1. Remove protective coating as recommended by protective coating manufacturer and
acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
Project No. 99037/50 02780 UNIT PAVERS- 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 - EXECUTION "
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed
with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances, from concrete substrates, that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be
visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units
without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
D. Joint Pattern: As indicated.
E. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over
waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or
otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and arrange for
repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving.
1. Provide joint filler, where indicated, at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces;
or, if not indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until paver installation is
complete.
F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8
inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
G. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install
joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
3.4 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
Project No. 99037/50 02780 UNIT PAVERS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's frill range.
2.3 UNIT PAVERS
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX, Type I, Application PX. Provide
brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
B. Rough-Stone Pavers: Rectangular paving stones, with split faces and edges, made from granite
complying with ASTM C 615.
1. Bluestone
2. Size: As indicated.
2.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
B. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200(0.075-mm) sieve.
2.5 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver
manufacturer.
B. Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073,No. 2 or No. 3.
C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381,Viscosity Grade AC-10 or AC-20.
D. Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting of
oxidized asphalt combined with 2 percent neoprene and 10 percent long-fibered mineral fibers
containing no asbestos.
E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
2.6 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MIX
A. Mix bituminous setting-bed materials at an asphalt plant in approximate proportion, by weight, of
7 percent asphalt cement to 93 percent tine aggregate, unless otherwise indicated. Heat mixture
to 300 deg F (149 deg C).
Project No. 99037/50 02780 UNIT PAVERS- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one
source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate duriag storage and construction against soiling or
contamination from earth and other materials.
1. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks
from steel strapping.
B. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work
damaged by frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply asphalt adhesive when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and when
temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately before
application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture.
2. Install bituminous setting bed only when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F (4
deg C) and when base is dry.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Brick Pavers:
a. Belden Brick Co.
b. Glen-eery Corporation. ,Aw%k
C. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc.
Project No. 99037/50 02780 UNIT PAVERS- 2
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02780-UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Brick pavers set in bituminous setting bed.
2. Rough-stone pavers set in aggregate setting bed.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under
unit pavers.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit pavers
with elastomeric sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Brick pavers.
2. Stone pavers.
3. Bituminous setting materials.
B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each
color,_texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
1. Provide Samples with joints grouted and cured, showing the full range of colors to be
expected in the completed Work.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Project No. 99037/50 02780 UNIT PAVERS- 1
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade: Proof-roll subgrade of granite curb and do necessary rolling and
compacting to obtain firm, even subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate depressed
areas. Remove incompatible materials,replace with clean fill and compact to 95%
of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Protection
Method.
B. Base: Spread porous base material and compact in maximum 6" lifts to 95%of the
maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Protector
Method.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Setting Curb: Place concrete at the joints as indicated on the Drawings. All
remaining spaces under the curb shall be filled with additional porous material
thoroughly compacted so that the curb will be completely supported throughout its
length.
B. Line and Grade: The curb shall be set at the line and grade required as shown on
the plans. Curb shall be fitted together as closely as possible.
C. Pointing: The joints (both front and back) between curb stones shall be carefully
filled with cement mortar and neatly pointed on the top and front exposed portions.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After pointing, the granite curb shall be satisfactorily cleaned of all excess mortar
that may have been forced out of the joints.
B. Wash granite curb free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material
immediately prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 02525 GRANITE CURBS -3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Mortar Materials: Deliver mortar materials in manufacturer's unopened and
undamaged containers with labels intact and legible. Store material off the ground,
under cover and protect from weather damage and deterioration. Stockpile and
handle aggregates to prevent mixing with foreign materials.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations.
B. Do not install granite curb work over wet, soggy, muddy or frozen subgrade.
C. Do not install concrete or mortar when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Use
of calcium chloride, salt, or any other admixture to prevent concrete or mortar
from freezing is prohibited.
D. Protect adjacent work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Granite Curb, Vertical and Sloped Faced: MAHD M9.04.1., M9.04.2, M9.04.6
(darker color preferred).
B. Mortar: MAHD M4.02.15.
C. Porous Fill: AASHTO M43, #6 (3/8" to 3/4") uniformly graded, clean crushed
stone or gravel.
D. Concrete: Section 02515 - Concrete Paving.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start granite curb work
until satisfactory conditions are corrected.
Project No. 99037/50 02525 GRANITE CURBS -2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02525 - GRANITE CURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Final subgrade preparation and porous base.
2. Granite curbs(sloped face and vertical face).
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Earthwork: Section 02300
B. Asphaltic Concrete Paving and Curbs: Section 02510
C. Concrete Paving and Curbs: Section 02512
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable operations, materials and methods shall be in accordance with the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Highway Department, Standard Specifications
for Highways and Bridges, 1988, and Addenda,(MAHD), except where otherwise
specified herein.
B. Provide stone from only one quarry to ensure cross-sectional uniformity and
consistent color range and texture.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of curb required.
B. Samples: Submit samples of portions of full size units to include the full range of
exposed color, texture and finish proposed for the work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stone Curb: Deliver, store and handle stone to prevent soiling and damage. Stack
stone off the ground.
Project No. 99037/50 02525 GRANITE CURBS -1
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Testing: Provide slump test on first load of concrete delivered each day and
whenever requested due to changes in consistency or appearance of concrete.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete work from damage due to construction and vehicular traffic until
final acceptance. Exclude construction and vehicular traffic from concrete
pavement for at least 14 days.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of work and upon completion of the work.
Remove excess materials, forms, debris, and equipment from site. Repair damage
resulting from concrete operations.
B. Sweep concrete walks and pavement and wash concrete surfaces and faces free of
stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material immediately prior to final
acceptance.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 02512 CONCRETE PAVING -5
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Placement:
1. Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting, and Placing Concrete", and as specified.
2. Moisten subgrade or base to provide a uniform dampened condition at time
concrete is placed.
3. Place and spread concrete to the full depth of the forms. Use only square-
end shovels or concrete rakes for hand-spreading and consolidating concrete.
Exercise care during spreading and consolidating operations to prevent
segregation of aggregate and dislocation of reinforcement.
4. Strike-off and bull-float concrete after consolidating. Level ridges and fill
voids. Check surface with a 10'-0" straightedge. Fill depressions and refloat
repaired areas. Darby concrete surface to provide a smooth level surface
ready for finishing.
B. Concrete Finishing: Complete surface finish as follows
1. Tool outside edges and joints with approved radius edging tool.
2. Textured finish for slabs-on-grade: Where indicated on Drawings provide
uniform, medium grained, non-directional finish, using wood float
C. Do not remove forms until concrete has set up sufficiently to support its own
weight without slumping.
D. Curing: Cure concrete with a non-staining liquid membrane-forming compound.
Apply spray in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates and
instructions immediately after completing surface finish.
E. Joint Caulking: Install bond breaker and caulk with sealer as specified by the
manufacturer.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide field quality control testing and inspection during concrete operations.
Project No. 99037/50 02512 CONCRETE PAVING -4
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Porous Material: AASHTO M43, #6 (3/8" to 3/4") uniformly graded, clean
crushed stone or gravel.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, A616, or A617, Grade 40, new domestic
deformed steel bars.
C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, premolded non-extruding asphalt-impregnated
fiberboard.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start concrete work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PAVINGS
A. Subgrade: Proof roll subgrade of concrete pavings and do necessary rolling and
compacting to obtain firm, even the subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate
depressed areas. Remove uncompactable materials, replace with clean fill and
compact to 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698
Standard Proctor Method.
B. Base: Spread porous base material and compact in maximum 8" lifts to 95% of the
maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Method.
C. Install, align, and level forms. Stake and brace forms in place.
D. Coat form surfaces in contact with concrete with form release agent. Clean forms
after each use and coat with form release agent as necessary to assure separation
from concrete without damage.
E. Locate, place, and support reinforcement as indicated on Drawings. Place
expansion joint.
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 02512 CONCRETE PAVING -3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Admixtures.
4. Air content.
5. Slump.
6. Time of loading.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I cement, natural color.
B. Course Aggregate: ASTM C33 normal weight aggregates, 1" maximum size,
clean, uncoated crushed stone or gravel coarse aggregate free of materials which
cause staining or rust spots;
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, clean natural sand.
D. Water: Clean, potable.
E. Air-entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
F. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C494.
2.02 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Provide only transit mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C-94.
1. Strength: 4,000 psi minimum at 28 days.
2. Slump range: 2" to 4" maximum as determined in accordance with ASTM
C-143
B. Provide a water-reducing admixture in concrete.
C. Provide an air-entraining admixture in concrete for an air content of 5%to 7% as
determined in accordance with ASTM C-173.
Project No. 99037/50 02512 CONCRETE PAVING -2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Aoftl Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02512 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Final subgrade preparation, and porous base.
2. Concrete slabs-on-grade.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Earthwork: Section 02300
B. Granite Curbs: Section 02525
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: The work of this Section will be performed by qualified and
experienced installers. The installers shall be organizations of established
reputation which are regularly engaged in and which maintain a regular force of
workmen skilled in the installation of the type of work specified in this section and
is acceptable to the Architect.
B. Applicable operations, materials and methods shall be in accordance with the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department, "Standard Specifications
for Highways and Bridges", 1988 and Addenda(MAHD), except where otherwise
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS: Deliver following submittals to Architect and obtain his approval
prior to ordering materials or beginning work or as otherwise required. Time
delivery to allow reasonable review period and prevent delays.
A. Concrete delivery tickets showing following:
1. Batch number.
2. Mix by class or sack content with maximum size aggregate.
Project No. 99037/50 02512 CONCRETE PAVING -1
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Average density of in-place material: Equal to or greater than 97%, with no
individual determination less than 95% of average density of laboratory
specimens.
2. Perform 1 test for density for each course for each day's work.
3. Thickness: Make at least 1 test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of each type of paving.
G. Test for surface smoothness with 10'-0" straight-edge. Define, remove, and
replace, or adjust deficient areas to design thickness by methods acceptable to
Architect.
H. During progress of work when field tests indicate that installed compacted
materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective materials, install
new materials, and re-test at Contractor's expense, as directed by the Architect.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect work from damage due to construction and vehicular traffic until final
acceptance.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work.
Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage
resulting from paving operations.
B. Sweep pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign
material immediately prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -10
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Perform sample brush-out to determine if pavement is fully cured. If
pavement crazes, spalls or shows other evidence of not being cured, allow
further time as necessary.
3. Lay out work with chalk for approval by Architect prior to painting.
4. Spray paint to uniform density at rate of 400 square feet/gallon and to 5.0
total dry mil thickness unless manufacturer recommends otherwise.
5. Make lines uniform 4" width unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
Markings and lines shall have crisp edges without noticeable fogging or
overruns. Lines shall be truly straight or curved as required. Work shall
have uniform coloring and appearance.
6. Protect and keep surrounding surfaces free of spills, overruns and other
damage. Clean immediately. Restore surfaces by approved methods.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide field quality control testing and inspection during asphaltic concrete
paving operations.
B. Contractor shall provide adequate notice, cooperate with, provide access to the
work, obtain samples, and assist Test Agency and their representatives in
execution of their function.
C. Before construction of granular subbase course, field verify that subgrade surfaces
are adequate and meet or exceed design bearing values. Provide a minimum of 1
test for each type of paving required.
D. When requested, perform laboratory tests on asphalt pavement mixes to determine
compliance with specified requirements.
E. Perform 1 series of compaction tests for granular subbase for each course for each
day's work and a minimum of one for each 100 linear feet of path and 1000 s.f. of
roadway/parking.
F. Test in-place asphaltic concrete base course and surface courses for compliance
with density and thickness. Take no smaller than 4" diameter pavement specimens
of each completed course. Repair test specimen holes to match adjacent work.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -9
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, and between successive
day's work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints
to have the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the asphalt
concrete course.
G. Apply appropriate tack or prime coat to contact surfaces of existing pavement,
curbs, and structures that will abut new pavement.
H. Begin rolling operations when the asphaltic concrete mixture will bear the weight
of the roller without excessive displacement. Compact areas inaccessible to rollers
with vibrating plate compactors.
I. Perform breakdown, second and finish rolling until the asphalt concrete mixture
has been compacted to the required surface density and smoothness. Continue
rolling until all roller marks are eliminated. Provide a smooth compacted surface
true to thickness and elevations required.
J. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on the pavement until it has
cooled and hardened, and in no case sooner than 8 hours.
K. Protect newly placed material from traffic by barricades or other suitable methods
acceptable to the Architect.
3.07 INSTALLATION: TRAFFIC STRIPING, MARKING AND SIGNS
A. General:
1. Provide lines, lettering and markings required to define vehicular parking
and standing spaces, and vehicular and pedestrian traffic flow.
2. Use approved traffic marking stencils for pavement signs and markings.
B. Barrier Free Parking Stalls: Provide special mounted signs, markings, striping and
stenciled pavement signs conforming to State Code requirements.
C. Installation:
1. Thoroughly clean finished asphalt surfaces before striping and marking.
Remove loose materials, dirt, and dust.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -8
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Align, bend, and adjust sections for whole assembly before setting.
6. Set edging and position stakes so that stake side will be turned away from
viewer's eye in finished landscape.
7. Assure that top lip of edging is flush with finish grade on both sides or as
otherwise indicated on Drawings. Backfill with care not to shift edging out
of alignment.
8. Where edging must be cut-to-fit use sharp saw, making cuts square and
clean.
9. Bend corners and angles sharply. Cut 2" deep kerf on bottom edge at point
of bend to keep bend to 1/2" radius or less. Use preformed corners at all 90°
turns. Use tapered ends at all edge terminations.
10. Stake edging at intervals of no more than 4' Lock butted ends securely with
splicer stake or other mechanism designed into system. Ensure that stakes
are driven full depth into firm subsoil and fully engaged.
11. Touch-up paint at all scrapes, scratches, etc.
3.06 INSTALLATION: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE MATERIAL
A. Remove loose and foreign material from compacted base immediately before
application of surface material. Do not start surface work until all other work
which may damage the finish surface is completed.
B. When asphaltic concrete surface material is not installed immediately following
the asphaltic concrete base course installation, apply tack coat to base course at the
rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per sq. yd. Allow to dry and cure.
C. Install asphaltic concrete surface material in single course.
D. Place, spread, and strike off the asphaltic concrete mixture on a properly prepared
and conditioned surface. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand.
Place each course to grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness indicated on
Drawings.
E. Place materials in strips not less than 10'-0" wide. After the first strip has been
placed and rolled, place all succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous
strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course materials.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -7
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Wipe treated surface, with a rubber edged squeegee to eliminate build-up.
D. Pavement Butt Type Joints: Cut and remove existing paving. Install prime or tack
coat as applicable followed by surface course.
E. Transition Surface Course for Existing Pavement: Install tack coat over entire
transition area followed by surface course as indicated on Drawings.
3.04 INSTALLATION: POROUS FILL, GRANULAR SUBBASE OR RECLAIMED
BASE COURSE AND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BASE
A. Install porous fill and granular subbase or reclaimed base course material up to 6"
thickness in single course; install 6" and greater thickness in 2 equal courses.
B. Install asphaltic concrete base materials in single course to total compacted depth
indicated on Drawings.
C. Compact porous fill and granular subbase or reclaimed base course material to
100% of ASTM D698 maximum dry density until a uniformly-smooth, hard
surface, complying with the lines, grades, elevations, and cross-sections shown has
been established. Moisture may be added at job site to aid compaction.
D. Compact asphaltic concrete base materials to 100% of ASTM D698 maximum dry
density until a uniformly-smooth, hard surface, complying with the lines, grades,
elevations, and cross-sections shown has been established.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF STEEL EDGE
A. Metal Edging:
1. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions except where otherwise
specified herein.
2. Assemble to lines and elevations indicated on Drawings. Lines shall not
vary by more than 1/2" in 10 feet, either vertically or horizontally.
3. Dig V-shaped trench and set edging into it. Do not drive edging into soil by
pounding.
4. Set edging truly vertical without warping or waffling with smooth curves
and straight lines that carry through butted sections. Keep lines and angles
converging on corners accurate, smooth and aligned.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -6
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof roll subgrade of vehicular traffic-bearing pavings and do necessary rolling
and compacting to obtain firm, even subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate
depressed areas. Remove uncompactable materials, replace with clean fill, and
compact to 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698
Standard Proctor Method.
B. Frame Adjustments:
1. Verify frames for manholes, catch basins, and other such structures within
areas to be paved are at their proper elevation and alignment.
2. Adjust frames as required to match paving. Provide temporary closures over
openings until completion of rolling operations. Remove closures at
completion of the work. Set covers to grade, flush with the surface of
adjoining pavement surface.
C. Coordinate junction of new and existing pavement. Saw cut existing pavement to
provide a uniform straight line transition. Meet existing surface levels and
maintain drainage slopes. Feathering of transitions is not acceptable.
D. Repair existing pavement before installing new overlay materials. Cut out
depressions minimum depth of 1" with vertical cuts. Install fresh surface materials
and compact with rolling equipment. Feathering of patches is not acceptable.
Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, and structures
abutting pavement.
3.03 INSTALLATION: GENERAL
A. Transport asphaltic concrete mixtures from the mixing plant to the project site in
trucks with tight, clean compartments.
B. Thoroughly clean existing pavement surfaces by air blowing, brooming or
vacuuming before starting repair or resurfacing operations.
C. Pavement seams in transition area of existing pavement:
1. Remove and waste existing loose asphaltic concrete surface material.
Owl
2. Fill seams with an emulsion slurry or liquid asphalt mixed with sand.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -5
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Asphaltic Concrete Surface: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section
M3.11.03, Table A, Dense Mix.
F. Prime Coat: Cutback asphalt, AASHTO M82, MC-30, MC-70 or MC-250,
medium curing.
G. Tack Coat: Asphalt emulsion, AA c HTO M-140 or M-208 SS-1, SS-1h, CRS-1,
CSS-1, or CSS-1h.
H. Traffic Striping and Marking Paint: Factory-mixed, quick-drying, non-bleeding
paint specifically formulated for marking asphaltic concrete surfaces. White in
color and as otherwise required by local regulations, state code and Architect.
I. Steel Edge: Steel edging, including pre-formed corners and tapered end pieces,
factory primed with 2 coats black paint in sizes indicated on Drawings furnished
with 15" steel stakes and accessories necessary to join and support sections.
"Ryerson Steel Landscape Edging" by Joseph T. Ryerson& Son, Inc., Chicago,
Illinois, or approved equivalent; gauge 3/16" x 4", 2.9 lbs./ft with stakes.
J. Traffic Signage: Coordinate for Owner's installation.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Paving equipment: Spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machines capable of
maintaining line, grade, and thickness shown.
B. Compacting equipment: Self-propelled rollers, minimum 10 ton weight for
roadways; smaller equipment is required for pathways.
C. Hand tools: Rakes, shovels, tampers, and other miscellaneous equipment required
to--complete the work.
D. Pavement painting equipment: Atomizing spray machines specifically designed
for work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start asphaltic concrete -*WAWA paving work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -4
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver manufactured products in manufacturer's original, unopened, and
undamaged containers with labels intact and legible. Store and handle
manufactured products to prevent damage and deterioration.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather limitations:
I. Do not install paving materials on wet or frozen subgrade surfaces.
2.- Do not apply prime and tack coat materials when temperature is 50 degrees
F. or below. Do not apply to wet base surface.
3. Install asphalt base and surface materials only when underlying surface is
dry and air temperature is 40 degrees F. or above.
B. Grade control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including
"^ crown, inverted crown, and cross-slopes, for each course during paving operations.
C. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of
project work and public safety.
D. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, and staining during paving
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Porous Fill: AASHTO M43, #6 (3/8" to 3/4") uniformly graded, clean-crushed
stone or gravel.
B. Granular Subbase: MAHD: Dense-graded, Crushed Stone for Subbase, M2.01.7.
C. Reclaimed Base Course: MAHD, Reclaimed Base Course, Section 403.40 and
Section MI.11.0; except that 100% shall pass 2" sieve.
D. Asphaltic Concrete Base: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section
M3.11.03, Table A, Dense Binder Course.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Tolerances:
I. In-place compacted thickness:
a. Subbase course: Maximum 1/2" plus, minus 0".
b. Base and Surface course: Maximum 1/4" plus, minus 0".
2. Finished surface smoothness:
a. Subbase course: Maximum 3/8" in 10'-0".
b. Base and Surface course: Maximum 1/4" in 10'-0", any direction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following to the Architect for his approval prior to ordering.
1. 2 copies of materials certificates signed by the material producer and the
Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceed
specified requirements.
2. Traffic striping and marking paint product data with recommended
application rate and methods of application.
B. Submit reports for testing and inspection of the following:
1. Subgrade surfaces.
2. Porous fill materials.
3.-;- Subbase materials (granular subbase or reclaimed base course).
4. Base materials.
5. Surface materials.
6. Compaction operations.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
ew Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02510 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Final subgrade preparation, porous fill and subbase course.
2. Roadway, and walkway paving.
3. Traffic stripping and signs.
4. Steel edge.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Earthwork: Section 02300.
B. Concrete Paving and Curbs: Section 02512.
C. Granite Curbs: Section 02525.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Owner reserves the right to provide testing and inspecting during paving
operations by an independent testing laboratory. Contractor shall provide
compaction testing and materials certifications.
B. Applicable operations, materials and methods shall be in accordance with the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department, "Standard Specifications
for Highways and Bridges", latest edition and Addenda(MAHD), except where
otherwise specified herein.
C. Provide aggregate and asphaltic concrete materials from sources, producers, and
plants accepted within the preceding 12 months on other projects for the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts having similar type specifications or
requirements.
Project No. 99037/50 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING -1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,
at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but
in no case fewer than three tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100
feet(30 m)or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each
150 feet(46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.21 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect, reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill
with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
I. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose
of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK- 12
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place
materials in a single layer.
5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3
inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
D. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials
and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95
,. percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials
in a single layer.
3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved
by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
Project No. 99037/50 02300 I:ARTIIWORK- 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot(3-m) straightedge.
3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage
Systems."
B. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as
indicated. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on drainage fabric to support
drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material and
wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to
within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage
fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry density according to
=ASTM D 698.
2. Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final subgrade.
3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions,
overlapping sides and ends.
B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric according to fabric
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or
ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit
weight.
3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557:
D. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95
percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 FARTI IWORK-9
Renovations to Wesley& I-lopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of ,
remaining trees.
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, darnpproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground .tilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings;
fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30
inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping
or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway
subbase.
D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 3/4 inch (19
rnm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides
and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
utility system.
E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
1:. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, arid as sheeting is removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
11. Listall warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6
inches 050 min) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 FILL
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTI-IWORK-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects
along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 4 inches (100 mm) in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit
on an undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 4 inches (100 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of
trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped
sand backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect.
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and ..�,
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock
excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the
Contract Documents.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;
underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material
not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock.
a. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Architect.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
MITI). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surface.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than
top of pipe. or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTIIWORK-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made
from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties
determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf(490 N);ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf(178 N);ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf(222 N);ASTM D 4833.
4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft. (100 L/s per sq. m);ASTM D 4491.
5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50(0.3 mm); ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect :structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect ;subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate
in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a ..w
combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, MI., MH, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm)
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm)sieve.
F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm)sieve.
G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm)sieve.
H. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve
and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)sieve.
I. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-
mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm)sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4(4.75-mm) sieve.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Drainage fabric.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed
for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to
ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
•. B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architects written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demottsh and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. ,..
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet
(9 m) in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders
of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m)
for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment
equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram
hammering, ripping, or blasting,when permitted:
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic
excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-)wide, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at
not less than 120-hp (89-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than
25,000 lbf (111 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf(83 M; measured
according to SAE J-1179.
2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157-
kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000-1bf (200-kN) breakout force;
measured according to SAE J-732.
1. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders
of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that when tested by an independent
geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration
resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm).
J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
K. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer
placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
M. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
l.,
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK, 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02300- EARTHWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade,walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Base course for asphalt paving.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and
protecting trees to remain.
3. Division 2 Section "Landscaping' for finish grading, including placing and preparing
topsoil for lawns and plantings.
4. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Dyer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
Project No. 99037/50 02300 EARTHWORK- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, ,
completely.
D. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below-grade utility structures.
1. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges,valves, or fittings.
2. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and disconnecting
devices.
3.8 SITE RESTORATION
A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in
Division 2 Section"Earthwork."
B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free
from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and
new grades.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" disposal of demolition materials and as
follows:
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
END OF SECTION 02215
Project No. 99037/50 02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Relocate indicated existing building. Use methods required to complete the Work as
follows:
1. Locate building shoring and cribbing materials so as not to impose excessive loads on
supporting walls, floors, or framing.
2. Provide temporary plates or protection to disperse wheel loads and minimize damage to
existing lawn, pavements and structures during moving operations.
B. Monitor the building as the Work progresses to detect hazards that may result from building
relocation activities.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building relocation operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without providing alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways.
3.5 RELOCATION ROUTE RESTORATION
A. Restore adjacent areas to condition existing before building relocation operations began.
3.6 REPAIRS
A. Inspect conditions of relocated building as soon as it has been placed upon new foundation for
cracks, failures or other damages during relocation operations. Document with photographs and
in written report and submit to Architect.
B. Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction and site caused by building relocation
operations.
C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new
materials.
D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a
manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.7 DEMOLITION OF ABANDONED STRUCTURES
A. General: Coordinate responsibilities of sub trades for demolition, removal and restoration of site
of existing building. Begin operations promptly after building has been relocated to allow
maximum time for `healing' of disrupted areas prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Remove structures and site improvements intact when permitted by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction.
Project No. 99037/50 02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION - 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Inventory and record the condition of structure to be moved.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate
and measure the nature and extent of the element. Promptly submit a written report to
Architect.
D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during building relocation operations.
E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building moving
operations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utilities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing,
and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and
sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of structure being
moved.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building
facilities during moving operations.
B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless
authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Maintain fences around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of
groups of trees to remain.
4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people
and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building area and to and from
occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
6. Protect walls, roofs, and other adjacent construction that are to remain during building
relocation operations.
3.4 RELOCATION, GENERAL
Project No. 99037/50 02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Owner will occupy other buildings immediately adjacent to work area. Conduct relocation so
Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
1. Provide not less than 36 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be relocated.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Arrange schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.
B. Coordinate operations with other work necessary for relocation work such as:
1. Tree removal
2. Protection of existing trees.
3. Protection of existing site improvements and utilities.
4. Partial demolition of building components.
5. Termination of existing utilities and services for building.
6. Salvage of building components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
building demolition required.
Project No. 99037/50 02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION - 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be encountered during building demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully
remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to
Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and building mover.
B. Insurance Certificate: Provide evidence of Building Movers insurance for liability and risk for the
limits defined in Division 1 -Supplementary Conditions.
C. Proposed Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use,
proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed
measures are later determined to be inadequate.
1. Interruption of utility services.
2. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
D. Inventory: After building demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
E. Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements,
including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by building relocatiotion
operations. Submit before Work begins.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Building Moving Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm with at least 10 years experience that
has specialized in relocation work similar in extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Pre-relocation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to building demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be moved.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structures.
3. Review and finalize building relocation schedule and verify availability of personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review and finalize protection requirements.
5. Inspect new building foundation and site and report any defects or deficiencies.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Buildings to be moved will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of Work.
Project No. 99037/50 02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02215 - BUILDING RELOCATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Relocation of structures.
2. Demolition and removal of site improvements adjacent to a building or structure to be
demolished.
3. Removing below-grade construction.
4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in place site utilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
2. Division 1 Section "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to
Owner or tenant occupancy of adjacent structures.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction
photographs taken before building relocation.
4. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction,
protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition
operations.
5. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures,
and site improvements.
6. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements not part of building demolition.
7. Division 15 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items.
8. "Vivision 16 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or recycled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and store them to ready for reuse.
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or recycled.
Project No. 99037/50 02221 BUILDING DEMOLITION- 1
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Topsoiling:
1. When installing topsoil in stripped areas adjacent to canopy edges and
vegetated areas to remain undisturbed, do not cover adjacent edges with soil
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, approved by Architect an except as
follows:
a. In order to eliminate sharp grade breaks in proposed finish grades up
and down, feather depth of topsoil out over short distance into vegetated
area and area beneath canopy blending surfaces together smoothly.
b. Moderate fills of 4" - 12": Place layer of approved drainage fill
material to 4" deep subgrade and cover with approved drainage fabric.
Fill with topsoil placed in single layer and fine grade. Provide drainage
system indicated on Drawings and as directed by Architect.
c. Deep fills: Construct as indicated on Drawings.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Routinely inspect protective barriers, trees, shrubs and vegetated areas for
damage and conditions which are causing damage and may cause damage.
Repair, treat and take corrective action without delay.
1. Inspect immediately after rains and during periods of runoff for ponding
and silting caused by drainage from construction areas. Promptly drain
and remove mud and silt back to natural grade.
2. Inspect and remove boulders, rocks, soil, stumps, limbs, vegetative
matter, debris, rubbish and waste that has been disposed of and
accidentally accumulated, particularly in shrub masses and wooded
areas.
3. Water trees and plants to remain as required to maintain their health
through construction period.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove protection materials at end of construction period when directed by
Architect and dispose of off site.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION -6
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Perform working using manual methods unless Architect approves each
specific piece of mechanical equipment being proposed for use.
B. Grubbing:
1. Strip grass and herbaceous plants by scalping top growth and thatch; then
carefully till or scarify existing grade to depth of 1", raking away loosened
root crowns and debris.
2. Neatly cut out and remove root crowns of woody undergrowth with hand
tools using care not to disturb intervening soil area. Promptly fill holes with
topsoil.
C. Stripping Topsoil: Remove only along approved, staked out corridors and edges in
careful, neat manner so as to minimize damage to adjacent, undisturbed areas.
D. Excavating and Trenching:
1. Limit excavating and trenching to only that required by Architect.
2. Tunnel under and around major roots by hand digging. Do not cut main
lateral roots and tap roots. Cut only smaller roots which interfere with
installation of new work with sharp pruning instruments. Do not break and
chop roots.
E. Cutting and Filling:
1. Where grade cuts expose major roots and massive root systems promptly
spread 6" protective covering of topsoil over the tops and ends of the
exposed roots and water in. Protect roots from further hazards and
construction operations.
2.� When existing grade at edge of canopy spread of trees and shrubs is higher
than adjacent proposed subgrade, cut gently, sloping transition outward from
edge and down to proposed subgrade.
3. When existing grade at edge of canopy spread of trees and shrubs is lower
than adjacent proposed subgrade, place fill to form gently sloping transition
outward from edge of canopy spread and upward to proposed subgrade.
Project No. 99037/50 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION -5
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to beginning work, examine trees and shrubs to remain and vegetated areas to
be left undisturbed in review with Architect and Arborist.
1. Arborist shall make recommendations for treatment of trees and shrubs to be
pruned or tied back to clear way for work for approval by Architect.
2. Architect will review type, locations and extent of protective barriers to be
installed as indicated on Drawings. In order to minimize damage to trees,
shrubs and undisturbed areas, to account for construction and field
conditions and improve protection, Architect may direct that:
a. Locations of layouts corridors, accessways, and work limits be adjusted.
b. Locations of area protection fencing and individual tree protection be
adjusted.
3. Contractor shall determine what additional protective barriers he may need
for adequate protection.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTIVE BARRIERS
A. Vegetated Area Protection: Install protective barrier fencing attached to posts set
no more than 6' on center along perimeter of each area as shown on the Drawings.
B. Individual Tree Protection: Install protective barrier fencing on existing grade as
shown on the Drawings.
3.03 WORKING AROUND EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS TO REMAIN AND
VEGETATED AREAS TO BE LEFT UNDISTURBED:
A. General:
1. When working within canopy spread of trees and in immediate vicinity of
shrubs, use care not to damage roots and their soil environment.
2. Relocated work to avoid damage if so directed by Architect.
Project No. 99037/50 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION -4
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
11. Damage to root system by flooding, ponding, filling, mud or silt buildup.
12. Damage by moving vehicles and equipment.
13. Trampling, foot traffic, congregations and other intrusions by workmen.
14. Other damaging occurrences.
C. If trees and shrubs to remain are severely injured and killed by construction
operations and inadequate care, Contractor shall:
1. Replace trees and shrubs under 3" cal. with new plants of same size, quality,
and species meeting same requirements and installed and maintained as new
plants under Planting Section.
2. Pay as fixed and agreed liquidated damages:
a. $800.00 for each tree 3"-5" caliper.
b. $1,800.00 for each tree 6"-11" caliper.
C. $5,000.00 for each tree 12" caliper or more.
d. $20,000 for the large weeping beech to the northeast of Hopkins House
and/or the cork tree approximately 20 feet off the southeast corner of
Haven House.
D. Restore vegetated areas to be left undisturbed which are damaged to the
satisfaction of Owner.
E. Coordinate with Owner concerning owner salvage and itransplanting of selected,
existing small trees and/or shrubs. Contact Rob Nicholson, Acting Head of
Botanic Garden, 585-2747.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fencing: Orange color, polypropylene, 4' high "Barricade Fencing" by Ben
Meadows Co., or equivalent, with 6' long wood or metal posts as approved by the
Architect.
Project No. 99037/50 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION -3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Removing selected trees and stumps, especially taking care in close
proximity to other trees to remain.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Arborist's inspection reports listing tree and shrub conditions needing
attention, corrective actions needed and treatments necessary. Owner to review
and approve tree care program.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Install protective barriers when site areas, utility corridors and construction
accessways have been staked out and work limits established during clearing and
grubbing prior to beginning topsoil stripping, earthwork and other construction.
Maintain in repair throughout construction period.
B. Throughout construction period protect existing trees and shrubs to remain and
vegetated areas to be left undisturbed from damage by construction activity
including:
1. Root area compaction.
2. Materials and equipment storage and stockpiles.
3. Contaminated runoff from equipment cleaning and spillages of harmful
substances.
4. Disposal of boulders, rocks, soil, stumps, limbs, vegetative matter, debris,
rubbish or waste.
5. Avoidable cutting of roots.
6. Breakage and barking.
7. Nailing, hanging, cutting or attaching.
8. Unapproved pruning.
9. Unapproved excavation within shrub masses and tree canopies.
10. Unapproved cutting of major roots.
Project No. 99037/50 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION -2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02110 - TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Protection throughout construction period of existing trees and shrubs to
remain, and vegetated areas to be left undisturbed.
2. Working around existing trees and shrubs to remain, and vegetated areas to
be left undisturbed.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Site Preparation: Section 02100.
B. Earthwork: Section 02300.
C. Topsoil: Section 02920.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engage licensed and approved Arborist with successful record on similar projects
and who is regularly engaged in and who maintains regular force of experienced
workers skilled in tree work to perform the following services; C.L. Frank Arborist
Company is the pre-approved campus arborist:
1 Conducting an initial inspection followed by inspections every 3 months
through construction period of trees and shrubs for damage and conditions
which cause damage, preparing and submitting written report promptly for
each inspection.
2. Tying back branches and pruning of branches and roots for clearance and
construction
3. Treating, pruning and caring for trees and shrubs damaged by construction,
maintaining their health throughout construction period.
Project No. 99037/ 0 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION -1
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
04"` Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
5. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.08 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Do not burn on Owner's property.
B. Remove waste materials from Owner's property and dispose off site in legal
manner.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Remove waste and debris as they accumulate to keep site clear.
B. Secure waste and debris so as not to cause hazard and nuisance.
C. Leave site clean and neat on completion of work.
D. Remove temporary protection and erosion control materials and legally dispose of
off site at such time they are no longer necessary for the purpose intended or are
ordered removed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -11
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
"awk
E. Remove concrete sections to the first control joint or expansion joint beyond new
work as otherwise indicated on Drawings. Saw cut clean continuous vertical edge
at control joints.
F. Remove curbing at existing joint.
G. Unearth and completely remove underground structures, bases, foundations,
footings.
3.06 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Prior to removing, tag existing trees and shrubs for removal. Owner will review
and verify these plants on site; otherwise they shall not be removed.
B. Clear trees, shrubs, stumps, branches and debris from areas indicated and required
to complete project work. Grub out and remove stumps, root crowns, 2" and larger
roots and matted roots.
C. Conduct clearing and grubbing work around existing trees and plants to remain as
required in Section 02110, Tree and Plant Protection.
D. Fill excavations made below sub-grade surface during removal of trees, shrubs,
stumps, root crowns and roots with suitable material, compacted thoroughly in
accordance with the provisions governing formation of fills in Section 02300,
Earthwork.
3.07 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent
intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and
other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing
with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1. Remove sod and grass from stockpile location.
2. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm).
3. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -10
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
tow Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Maintenance and Cleaning
1. If temporary erosion and sediment control measures are disturbed, repair
immediately.
2. If seed is washed out before germination and otherwise fails to germinate
and establish, repair damage and reseed.
3., Maintain temporary control measures until permanent control measures are
established and until such time as such features are no longer needed.
4. Clean out ditches, catch basins, drains, culverts and other drainage as
required.
3.04 SALVAGE OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
A. Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged, and store where directed.
B. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements to be
salvaged.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition to satisfaction of
Architect.
3.05 REMOVAL OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
A. Demolish and remove from site above grade and below grade improvements and
existing conditions required for completion of project work.
B. Abandonment and removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be
indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of
those sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping and conduits
interfering with construction is included under this Section.
C. Scarify and remove existing bituminous, concrete and other pavements and gravel
bases to be removed, including any reinforcement.
D. Where sections of existing bituminous pavement are removed, make clean,
continuous vertical saw cut through pavement between material to be removed and
material to remain. Protect vertical edges of material to remain from damage.
Project No. 990307-50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -9
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Sedimentation and Erosion Control installations shall be installed prior to any
excavation or filling operations on site.
The Architect has the authority to control, the surface area of earth materials
exposed by construction operations and to direct the Contractor to immediately
provide permanent or temporary pollution control measures to prevent
contamination of adjacent streams, watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other areas of
water impoundment. Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to immediately
provide permanent or temporary pollution control measures to prevent
contamination of adjacent streams, watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other areas of
water impoundment. Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to prevent
erosion on the site and abutting property.
The Architect has the authority to direct the Contractor to divert surface water
runoff away from exposed raw earth surface through the use of temporary berms,
dikes, and diversion channels.
Control measures as shown and detailed on the Drawings shall be subject to
addition and/or modification as necessary or required to meet actual conditions or
as ordered by a Local, State or Federal authority.
B. Hay Bales and Silt Fences
1. Install hay bales and silt fences, as required, for temporary control of erosion
and to prevent silt and sediment from reaching adjacent properties, entering
catch basins, and damaging the work in progress.
2. Stake hay bales securely to hold them in place. Erect silt fences burying
bottom edges in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
installation instructions.
3.f-- Provide sufficient number of hay bales and length of fence to accommodate
runoff without causing flooding and to adequately store silt, sediment, and
debris reaching it.
4. Stockpiles and earth surfaces which will be exposed for extended periods
and intervals during construction period may be ordered to be seeded with
rye grass to obtain temporary cover. Sow seed at rate of approximately one
pound, P.L.S. per 1,000 s.f. Promptly mulch area after seeding.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -8
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Seed for Temporary Erosion Control Cover: Annual rye grass seed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions un,ter which site preparation will be performed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 STAKE-OUT
A. The Survey Engineer shall provide and maintain staking throughout the
construction period as required for accurate construction of each stage of the work
and adequate for Architect's inspection as follows:
1. Stake-out locations of boundaries and Limits of Work, proposed buildings,
utility structures and changes of direction of utility lines, horizontal
alignments, edges and curbs of paved areas, walkways and walls and other
elements to be installed to dimensional requirements indicated on Drawings.
2. Install grade stakes for finish grade and subgrade elevations for rough and
finish grading and paved areas. In general, set stakes at intervals no more
than 50' apart and at closer intervals at high and low points, along ridge
lines, prominent grade breaks, saddles, toes and shoulders of slopes, and
drainage lines.
3. Install grade stakes for vertical alignments of roadways and walks including
high and low points at 50' intervals or closer as required.
4;�,- Set inverts of underground utilities.
5. Set elevations for footings, foundations, utility structures, walls, curbs,
fences, paving, pads, slabs, equipment, signs, lights and proposed other
elements.
3.03 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction. Install sedimentation ponds.. haybales, silt fences, and
antitracking stone pads where required, indicated, or ordered by the Architect.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -7
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
utility shut-offs/disconnections to be done by others are complete before
beginning work.
3. When uncharted and incorrectly charted underground piping, other utilities
and services are encountered during sitework operations, notify applicable
utility company immediately to obtain procedure directions. Cooperate with
utility company in maintaining active services in operation.
4. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after
arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
a. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
b. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission.
5. Excavate for underground utilities indicated to be removed.
6. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 15 Mechanical or
Division 16 Electrical sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Erosion Control:
1. Hay Bales: Rectangular shaped bales of hay or straw weighing at least 40
pounds each without rot and mold and free from noxious weed seeds and
_ woody material. Provide two 4' long, sound, hardwood stakes per bale.
2. Silt Fence: "Geo-fab Silt Fence" by Merchatile Development, Inc., "Mirafi
140 by Celanese Fibers Marketing Co., or approved equivalent.
3. Fiber Mat: "Curlex Blanket" by Amxco, "Ero-Mat" by Armco, or approved
equivalent.
4. Filter Fabric: "Terra Bond" by Warren's, "Trevira Spunbond" by Hoechst, or
approved equivalent. Product shall be of type specifically manufactured for ,
the purpose intended.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -6
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. If interference is unavoidable, take measures to reroute drainage and
control erosion effect. Repair damaged control facilities and measures.
H. Make continued timely cleaning, maintenance, repair and replacement of
temporary control and protective facilities and measures throughout construction
period.
I. Stake Out:
1. If during stake out operations conflicts are found in proposed dimensional
layout, spot grades and elevations indicated on Drawings notify Architect
and obtain his direction for resolution.
2. At completion of stake-out, the Architect reserves right to adjust location and
elevations of layouts to minimize damage trees, shrub and improvements to
remain, areas to be left undisturbed, and areas adjacent to site.
J. Safety:
1. Provide for worker safety.
2. Provide barricades and other warning equipment set up to keep Owner and
public safe.
3. Minimize adverse noise impact to workers and surrounding Owner and
public.
4. Provide construction fences and gates enclosing perimeters of staging and
work areas, located and arrange for security of site and safety of Owner and
public.
K. Utilities and Services:
1. Locate and identify existing underground and overhead services and utilities
within work areas. Provide adequate means of protection of utilities and
services to remain. Contact DIG-SAFE, 1-800-344-7233 and follow
procedures for this program.
2. Arrange for disconnection, disconnect, seal and cap utilities and services to
be removed before start of sitework operations. Perform work in accordance
with the requirements of applicable utility company or agency. Coordinate
and review with Owner all disconnections before starting. Verify that all
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -5
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Dust Control: Take care to eliminate dust caused by construction operations
before it leaves site. Dampen with water and take other measures as necessary.
G. Erosion and Sediment Control Measures. Work shall conform with any orders or
directives issued by the governing conservation commission or other authority.
1. Take temporary and permanent erosion control measures before and during
construction to avoid erosion of exposed, incomplete cut slopes, cleared or
grubbed embankments, trenches, excavation, and site graded areas.
Continue erosion control measures until permanent measures have been
established and are capable of controlling erosion on their own.
2. Schedule and conduct operations to minimize erosion of soils and to prevent
silting and muddying of buildings, walks and lands adjacent to and affected
by the work. Keep area of soil exposed by construction at any one time to a
minimum.
3. Install erosion control measures including water diversion structures and
ditches, sedimentation basins or raps, berms, staked hay bales, and seeding,
mulching, covering with netting, sodding, and seeding disturbed areas in
compliance with U.S.D.A. "Guidelines for Soil and Water Conservation in
Urbanized Areas of Massachusetts".
4. Prevent silting of water courses, streams, drainage, ditches, swales, wetlands,
or watersheds, and water supplies, reservoirs, or impoundments.
5. Prevent silting and clogging of existing storm drainage system.
6. Should it become necessary to suspend construction for any length of time,
provide and maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures until
permanent drainage facilities and erosion control features have been
completed and are operational.
7. Provide temporary cover on stockpiled topsoil, spoils, excavated and backfill
materials.
8. Take special precautions to avoid interference and damage to temporary and
permanent drainage facilities and erosion control measures when
constructing temporary structures, placing construction material and moving
vehicles.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -4
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Accommodating Owner:
1. Owner will occupy premises and adjacent facilities during entire period of
construction. Perform sitework operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Owner's use of premises and conduct of his normal operations.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by
Owner and others without approval of Architect and then only after
temporary utility services have been provided, if required by Architect.
3. Carry out work in way that minimizes inconvenience to Owner.
4. Install temporary accessways for Owner access to occupied premises in
locations required. Keep accessways safe and clear of construction materials
and equipment.
C. Traffic: Conduct site preparation operations to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close
and obstruct streets, walks and other occupied or used facilities without permission
from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around
closed or obstructed traffic-ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protection measures and devices as
necessary to prevent damage as follows:
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, acceptable to
parties having jurisdiction.
3. Locate, protect, and maintain bench marks, monuments, control points, and
project engineering reference points.
4. Protect adjoining pavements, curbs, and other structures to remain from
damage. Do not allow these to be undermined by the removal of supporting
bases, footings, and subgrade.
5. Protect existing utility and service lines and structures to be re-engaged in
new systems.
►, E. Tree and Plant Protection: Protect exiting trees and plants as specified in Section
02110.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -3
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Qualifications: One person, designated by Installer, shall be present during work
operations who is thoroughly familiar with operations, types of materials being
installed and proper methods for their installation and shall supervise work
performed under this Section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule indicating proposed work methods, operations and sequence.
Include termination and continuation of utility services required by project
conditions. Obtain Architect's approval before starting work.
B. Submit for approval plans indicating staging areas, trailer and stockpile locations,
construction traffic and parking plans, temporary signage, off-site staging, storage
areas, setup areas and construction phasing. Coordinate plans with erosion and
sediment control measures, as required.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General:
1. Work to be done is generally included within the Work Limit Lines, but
work as indicated and required shall be performed beyond Lines. If
Contractor uses portions of property beyond Limit Lines to accomplish
work, restore these portions at completion of work to satisfaction of
Architect.
2. Data shown on Site Plans has been taken from Topographic Survey of Site
made by others and is not guaranteed by Architect and Owner. The
Contractor shall satisfy himself by field examination as to accuracy of
information shown. No responsibility is assumed by Owner and Architect
for variations of conditions found at Site.
3. Verification of Conditions: Consult Records and Drawings of adjacent work
of existing services and utilities which may affect site work operations.
Carefully examine the site and conditions affecting work of this Section. No
claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of knowledge of
conditions.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -2
Renovations to Wesley & Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02100 - SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Verification of existing conditions.
2. Layout and grade staking.
3. Erosion and sediment control.
4. Removal and salvage of existing improvements.
5. Removal and disposal of existing improvements.
6. Clearing and grubbing.
7. Protection of utilities.
8. Traffic control.
9. Owner accommodations.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Tree and Plant Protection: Section 02110.
B. Earthwork: Section 02300.
C. Topsoil: Section 02920.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform work to applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations having
jurisdiction.
B. Conform erosion and sediment control materials and methods to standards set in
U.S.D.A. Soil Conservation Service, "Guidelines for Soil and Water Conservation
in Urbanized Areas of Massachusetts".
C. Engage licensed Survey Engineer acceptable to Architect to do layout and grade
staking of work through construction period.
Project No. 990307/50 02100 SITE PREPARATION -1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for
each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only
sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section
ate" "Project Record Documents."
E. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01782
Project No. 99037/50 0 1782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and
component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts
identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources
of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
Project No. 99037/50 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
Awk
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Project No. 99037/50 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in ,
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including :,ispection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
I . Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Project No. 99037/50 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment,
and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data
in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to
indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment
included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number
and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 l-inch (115-by-280-mm), 20-lb/sq. ft. (75-g/sq.
m)white bond paper.
5. drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as
foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
Project No. 99037/50 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 COORDINATION „„k-
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and
maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance
manual.
1 . Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE
Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
Project No. 99037/50 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01782-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,
systems and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for products in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 1 draft copies of each manual at least 10 days before requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
Architect will return draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual to Owner in final form at least 15 days after final
Ook
inspection.
Project No. 99037/50 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary
to provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project
Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
Project No. 99037/50 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set
of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract
Drawings.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one copy of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD
Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad Version
14.
C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on
cover sheets.
2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each CAD file.
3. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation"PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Project No. 99037/50 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Projects Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
C. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
-h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
1. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
tn. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show
cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Project No. 99037/50 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordinating Project Record
Documents covering the Work of multiple contracts.
2. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and maintenance
manual requirements.
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of products in those Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial
and date each print and mark whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return
prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, one set of Record
CAD Drawing files, one set of Record CAD Drawing plots. Plot and print each
Drawing, only if changes and additional information were recorded.
1) Electronic Media: 3-1/2-inch diskettes, formatted for 1.44 MB.
Project No. 99037/50 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
M. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
* n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces
of diffusers, registers, and grills.
P. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials
into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
Project No. 99037/50 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. ,
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and
ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Prepare the Project for final cleaning by the Owner. All interior spaces shall be free of
construction debris, floors swept broom clean and interior surfaces dusted. Where in the
opinion of the Architect, excessive dust and dirt have accumulated due to construction
operations, interior walls and ceilings shall be washed.
C. Coordinate cleaning operations with Owner's staff.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap, shampoo
if visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign ,AftK
substances.
Project No. 99037/50 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-I 1-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health
or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
Project No. 99037/50 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data,where applicable.
D. Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for
record shop drawings and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind
or file miscellaneous records by Specification Section and identify each, ready for continued use
and reference.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: ►
1. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Piping diagrams.
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
-b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
C. Maintenance procedures.
d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
e. Maintenance record forms.
f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify '"ow%
Project No. 99037/50 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. [Use CSI
Form 14.1A.]
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding
from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
4, Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Project No. 99037/50 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
6. Coordinate final changeover of permanent locks with Owner.
7. Complete startup testing of systems.
8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION "+►.
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architects Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Project No. 99037/50 0 17 70 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final
Completion construction photographs.
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Project No. 99037/50 0 17 70 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an
approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply
with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of
installation.
Ank
F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of
uniform appearance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged:
1. <Insert description of items to be removed and salvaged.>
END OF SECTION 01732
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting
elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during
selective demolition operations.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
I. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Restore
finishes to match finishes of new location.
2. Protect items from damage during storage.
3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
F. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Where indicated, salvage bricks
for reuse. Remove mortar, clean with wire brush and stack on pallets. Salvage only full size units
in sound condition.
G. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
H. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations
in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
I. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing.
Refer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
operations.
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION - 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread
of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1. Provide temporary enclosures and seals to contain dust to demolition areas and protect
existing finishes scheduled to remain for damage due to demolition operations.
2. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
3. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space
before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during
flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free
fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to Idawk
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents
and vermin before and during selective demolition operations.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
D. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
I. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to
and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction
operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying
or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
G. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to
remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being
demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
3.4 POLLI ITION CONTROLS
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. Provide temporary
supports, bracing and shoring to support building elements until new support systems are in
place.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in
writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide at least 48 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
-remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,
removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility
disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases,
explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective
demolition operations.
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
2. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. <Insert items to be removed by Owner.>
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before the start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification
Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION - 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall
be removed from Project site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
B. Proposed Dust-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures
proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify
options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
D. Predemolition Photographs or Statement: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by selective demolition operations. Prepare statement of conditions noted in predemolition walk
through with Architect and Owner's representative. Submit before Work begins.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
F. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
selective demolition operations.
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
2. Division 1 Section"Alternates" for alternates affecting the Work of this Section.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction
photographs taken before selective demolition.
4. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
5. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective
demolition operations.
6. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
7. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
8. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage for Owner: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner.
C. Remove and Salvage for Reuse: Detach items from existing construction and prepare for reuse.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
Project No. 99037/50 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION - 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching
and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, sand, apply primer, vinyl spackle, sand,
and apply intermediate paint coats over the patch. Apply final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends
with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane "mom
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that provides a uniform
appearance and restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. Where extending existing
board siding offset end cuts to avoid obvious line of patch.
END OF SECTION 01731
Project No. 99037/50 0 17 31 CtJTTING AND PATCHING-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins I-louses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed
during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D. Existing Fire Protection System: Where portions of existing system are required to be removed,
relocated, or abandoned, bypass such system before cutting to minimize interruption of services
to other areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when
not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-
core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Project No. 99037/50 01731 CJ JTTING AND PATCHING-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Control systems.
5. Communication systems.
6. Electrical wiring systems.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
2. Membranes and flashings.
3. Equipment supports.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architects opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Project No. 99037/50 0 17 31 CUTTING AND PATCHING- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building for alterations.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer
to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Primary operational systems and equipment.
2. Air or smoke barriers.
3. Fire-protection systems.
Project No. 99037/50 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4,,, 6. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete
installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place
into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
7. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures
to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and
information.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available,
do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities
until Substantial Completion.
E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
'paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill
that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated
with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that
might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs,
and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
Awk END OF SECTION 01500
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS- 11
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially Aav%,
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
1. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-
) thick exterior plywood.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar
materials.
2. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with
load-bearing,wood-framed construction.
H. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration during demolition operations.
1. Construct dustproof, floor-to-ceiling partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm)
studs,with 6-mil(0.14-mm)polyethylene sheets, on construction side of enclosure.
AMW
a. Seal doors of rooms 6-mil(0.14-mm)polyethylene sheets.
b. Sequence demolition to allow use of existing doors and partitions to limit need for
temporary enclosures to greatest extent possible.
I. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Sequence demolition of sprinkler to allow maintenance of existing fire protection facilities
as long as practical.
2. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served, with sign mounted above.
.a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers.
b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of
extinguishers of NFPA-recommetided classes for exposures.
C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
3. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
4. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous
fire-exposure areas.
5. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS- 10
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar
material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
J. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to
condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater
from heavy rains.
C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage,
flooding, and erosion.
D. Temporary Site Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, install portable chain-link enclosure
fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or
portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that
will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site.
1. Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth.
2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and
other construction operations.
3. -Provide temporary painted wood fence to surround new foundation from April 24, 2000
until after commencement activities.
a. Fence shall enclose entire foundation area.
b. Foundation will be filled with temporary ramp.
C. Remove all construction equipment from site.
d. Restore areas outside the fence disturbed by construction, seed with temporary mix
to germinate in 7-10 days.
e. Protect area from foot traffic with portable fence.
f. Remove portable fence two days prior to commencement.
Oak
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public
roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with
construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary
drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.
3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary
waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,
for each type of waste material to be deposited.
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste
materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed
information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide "
information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose
of all waste materials.
F. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated,weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use
as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to
accommodate required office personnel and meetings at Project site. Keep office clean and
orderly.
1. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
a. Desk and two chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and
bookcase.
b. Water cooler.
C. Coffee machine and supplies, including regular and decaffeinated coffee, filters,
cups, stirring sticks, creamer, sugar, and sugar substitute.
Cl. Provide a room of not less than 240 sq. ft. for Project meetings. Furnish room with
conference table and 12 folding chairs..
G. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds are fully enclosed
spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.
11. Lifts and Hoists: Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered
°tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for
common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate
telephone line for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with
modem in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
C. Contractor's home office.
d. Architects office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide an answering machine on superintendents telephone.
4. Provide a portable cellular telephone or paging system for superintendents use in making
and receiving telephone calls when away from field office.
3.3 PHASE 2-SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Locate field office, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and
support facilities for easy access.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period.
Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas.
Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for
construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Construct temporary ramp for building relocation to suit building movers requirements.
Protect new foundation by placing compacted material on both sides of walls. Fill material
may be re-used to fill demolished foundation area.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide
separate facilities for male and female personnel.
3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.
a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed
water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F(7.2 to 12.7 deg Q.
4. Locate drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than two stories vertically
or 200 feet horizontally to facilities.
5. Locate toilets so personnel need not walk more than two stories vertically or 200 feet
horizontally to facilities and in locations approved by the Architect and Owner.
F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed
portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for
finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.
G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as
equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
I. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.
Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic
areas.
4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary connections to sanitary and drainage sewers to remove
effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If storm sewers are not available or cannot be used,
provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities.
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that
might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers as directed by sewer department officials.
3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After
heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify
effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use.
D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. 'Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
2. Maintain fire-protection system operational to the greatest extent possible during the
construction period. Provide temporary distribution piping and caps to existing portions
of the building to maintain fire-protection system.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply
with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Wood Enclosure Fence: Stockade style, 6 feet high, framed in panels with top and bottom rails,
with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart, painted white.
E. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section."
F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
G. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
H. Water: Potable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes;
heated and air conditioned.
C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
D. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
E. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.
F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
G. Power- Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and
termination of each temporary utility.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary
utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time,when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service
during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously
assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition
may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 "Earthwork" for placement of gravel for temporary roads and
paved surfaces
C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Orange plastic fabric construction fencing; with cold formed steel
stakes 6-0 apart minimum.
s
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
8. Covered walkways.
9. Temporary enclosures.
10. Temporary partitions.
11. Fire protection.
E. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of
implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
2. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for construction and maintenance of gravel sub-base for
temporary roads and paved areas.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for
products in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weather-tight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.4 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Owner's construction forces.
2. Occupants of Project.
3. Architect.
4. Testing agencies.
5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Use sewer from Owner's existing sewer system without payment of use charges
C. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
D. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROIS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sewers and drainage.
2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
4. Ventilation.
5. Electric power service.
6. Lighting.
7. Telephone service.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Temporary roads and paving.
2. Dewatering facilities and drains.
3. Project identification and temporary signs.
4. Waste disposal facilities.
5. Field offices.
6. Storage and fabrication sheds.
7. Lifts and hoists.
8. Temporary stairs.
9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Environmental protection.
2. Stormwater control.
3. Tree and plant protection.
4. Pest control.
5. Site enclosure fences.
6. Security enclosure and lockup.
7. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Project No. 99037/50 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a
manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
Project No. 99037/50 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by
the Contract Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality,
control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within fifteen(15) days of
date established for the Notice to Proceed.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
Project No. 99037/50 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering se-:ices are defined as those performed for installations of the
system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall
be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests
and inspections to be performed.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
'that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified
and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
2. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractors responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
3. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Project No. 99037/50 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspectior.; required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 1
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
Project No. 99037/50 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover
production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractors quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
Project No. 99037/50 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
P. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
Q. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
R. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect,
Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractors approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Approved
2. Not Approved
3. Revise and ReSubmit
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal
to appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END 01-SECTION 01330
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-9
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
L. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division I
Section "Closeout Procedures."
M. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
N. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
O. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES- 8
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure
Qualification Record(PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturers letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
J. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
rl + K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES- 7
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. Delivery time.
6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit three (3) full sets of available choices
where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain
one (1) Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
K. Key Personnel and Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms
proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or
equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. ,
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-6
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
40*,, f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
a: Initial Submittal: Submit two (2) blue- or black-line prints. Architect will return
one print.
b. Final Submittal: Submit five (5) blue-or black-line prints, unless prints are required
for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit six (6) prints where prints are
required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two (2)
prints; transmit one(1) print to the Owner and remainder will be returned.
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color
and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following:
partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of
materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture,
and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and
inspection.
4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architects sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name or name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, provide the following:
a. Size limitations.
b. Compliance with recognized standards.
C. Availability.
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Number of Copies: Submit five (5) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, will return two (2) copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where
selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required.
Architect will return submittal with options selected.
b. Final Submittal: Submit five (5)copies, unless copies are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Submit six(6) copies where copies are required for operation
and maintenance manualF Architect will retain two (2) copies; transmit one (1)
copy to the Owner an,: remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one
returned copy as a Project Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
1. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
M. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
C. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to Architect in addition to specified number of copies to
concurrent reviewer or consultant.
2. Retain copies submitted and returned marked with action taken for maintenance manuals.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the
related submittal.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination (To:).
d. Source(From:).
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.
g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i. Remarks.
j. Signature of transmitter.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architects receipt of submittal.
1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal.
3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that
submittals may be transmitted directly to Architects consultants, provide duplicate copy of
transmittal and submittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before
being returned to Contractor.
4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
5. Allow 7 days for processing each resubmittal.
6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
C. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
4ow- reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and
construction photographs.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated-Design Submittals [and for erecting mockups].
5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architects responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architects approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
Oak
Project No. 99037/50 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 0 13 10
Project No. 99037/50 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION -5
III
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
possible schedule meetings to coincide before or after weekly progress meetings. Advise
Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
1. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
M. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
S. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Required performance results. lowok
U. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work
and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings
with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do low#,
Project No. 99037/50 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three (3) days of
the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,
at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than seven (7) days after execution of
the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the
meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
i. Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Parking availability.
m. Office,work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
o. First aid.
P. Security.
q. Progress cleaning.
r. Working hours.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Whenever
Project No. 99037/50 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy,water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
into, the Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination
is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of
principal staff and sub-contractors, including superintendent and other personnel at Project site.
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers.
Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the
absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. -"Wk
Project No. 99037/50 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 0 13 10- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and
control points.
3. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
Project No. 99037/50 0 13 10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Performance and payment bonds.
15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. Evidence that claims have been settled.
7. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
Project No. 99037/50 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment.
Sample copies are included at end of this Section.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractors Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to Architect hand delivered at regular project meeting or by a method ensuring receipt
within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final).
4. Products list.
5. Schedule of unit prices.
6. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
Project No. 99037/50 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architects project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
'subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Project No. 99037/50 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01290- PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule
and Submittals Schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractors Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
.and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven
(7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: The Work is separated into three projects requiring separate accounting of
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each project.
Project No. 99037/50 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the „
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of
Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on ALA
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
'substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
Project No. 99037/50 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on ALA Document G710,
"Architects Supplemental Instructions."
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within seven (7) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Archtect.
Project No. 99037/50 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. WESLEY HOUSE
WI: Delete replacement windows.
W2: Remove existing slate, (lashings, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing and replace with
new slate and copper flashings.
W3: Refurbish student rooms per alternate schedule.
W4: Paint exterior building trim and clapboards Color A and wood shingles Color B.
W5: Delete new shed dormer at third floor.
W6: Change specified radiation to fin tube radiation.
WT Delete DD controls to student rooms.
B. HOPKINS HOUSE
H 1: Delete basement demolition, underpinning, excavation and new supports and foundations
under the existing building.
112: Remove existing slate, flashings, and wood shingle roofing to sheathing and replace with
new slate and copper flashings.
Repeat above as often as necessary to include all alternates for Project.
END OF SECTION 01230
Project No. 99037/50
01230 ALTERNATES- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in
the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work
of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of
alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for
later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described
under each alternate.
Project No. 99037/50 01230 ALTERNATES - 1
Renovations to Wesley& I lopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On .1040'
occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
Project No. 99037/50 0 l 140 WORK RESTRICTIONS- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
low SECTION 01140-WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated as the Contract Limit.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
"" b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on-site.
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during Phase 1 of the
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize
conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment
in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does
not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy
shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
Project No. 99037/50 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall
be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable
as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE
END OF SECTION 01100
Project No. 99037/50 01100 SUMMARY-4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
low 1.7 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE
A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be
incorporated into the Work. Owner has assigned these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs
for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are
included in the Contract Sum.
1. Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Orders,
including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-Order
agreements.
2. The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance is included at the end of this Section.
1.8 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish <Insert a brief description of Owner-furnished products>. The Work
includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment [and plumbing, mechanical,
and electrical connections].
1. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractors Construction Schedule.
2. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present
for and assist in Owner's inspection.
3. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
,AAA. 4. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at
Project site.
S. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
6. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
1.9 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-
division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat' numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the
Contract Documents.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Project No. 99037/50 01100 SUMMARY- 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
and exterior painting; bath and shower accessories; toilet partitions; kitchen cabinets; new
plumbing systems, new heating system; and electrical improvements
1.3 CONTRACT[S]
A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1A WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Work shall be conducted in two(2) phases.
1. Phase 1: Work includes building excavation; construction of foundation walls and
temporary fill in preparation for the relocation of Wesley House. Temporary seeding of
disturbed areas and protection barricades will be constructed and maintained until after
commencement exercises. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete in 20
working days or no later than May 1, 2000.
2. Phase 2: Work includes relocation of Wesley House, completion of foundation work and
renovations and additions to Wesley and Hopkins House including site improvements.
Work of this phase commences May 15, 2000 and shall be substantially complete by
September 1, 2000.
1.5 USE OF PREMISES -aw
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate Contracts: Owner will award separate contracts for performance of certain construction
operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under
this Contract. These contracts include the following:
1. Asbestos Abatement: A separate contract will be awarded to perform limited abatement
operations as indicated in the reference drawings included as Appendix A to this Section.
2. Kitchen Equipment: A separate contract will be awarded to provide kitchen equipment for
installation by the Contractor in Wesley and Hopkins Houses and to provide and install
stainless steel countertops in Hopkins House. The equipment list is included as Appendix
B to this Section.
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried our
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
lowk
Project No. 99037/50 01100 SUMMARY- 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01100-SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of Renovations to Wesley and Hopkins Houses.
1. Project Location: Smith College, Northampton, MAO 1060
2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated February 25, 2000, were prepared for
Project by Kuhn Riddle Architects,Amherst, MA 01002.
C. Project Manager: Gary Hartwell has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project Manager.
D. The Work consists of construction of a new foundation and utility work in Phase 1, relocation of
Wesley House and renovations to Wesley and Hopkins Houses in Phase 2.
1. The Work includes three projects to be completed concurrently.
2. Project A: Site preparation, improvements and restoration as required for the relocation of
Wesley House to a new foundation including extension of site utilities, relocation and
upgrade of services in Haven House to supply Wesley and all preparation in the new
basement necessary to provide services to the building once it has been placed upon the
new foundation.
3. Project B: Renovation and additions to Wesley House after relocation including rough
and finish carpentry; insulation of new and existing assemblies, membrane, copper sheet
and slate roofing; wood doors in wood and hollow metal frames; replacement windows;
'veneer plaster and gypsum board substrates with paint and vinyl wall coverings; sheet vinyl,
rubber tile and linoleum flooring, carpeting; interior and exterior painting; bath and
shower accessories; toilet partitions; kitchen cabinets; new plumbing systems; new heating
system; and electrical improvements.
4. Project C: Renovation and additions to Hopkins House including site improvements for
accessibility; modification of site utilities; concrete slabs and foundations; brick site walls
and veneer to exterior walls; rough and finish carpentry; insulation of new and existing
assemblies, membrane, copper sheet and slate roofing; wood doors in wood and hollow
metal frames; replacement windows;veneer plaster and gypsum board substrates with paint
and vinyl wall coverings; sheet vinyl, rubber the and linoleum flooring; carpeting; interior
Project No. 99037/50 01100 SUMMARY- 1
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert
the word"Partner' under each signature. Affix seal to each signature.
3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures.
Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the
corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the
company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law
resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with
the Bid Form in the bid envelope.
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION
6.01 DURATION OF OFFER
A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty(60)days after
the bid closing date.
6.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER
A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
Om.. B. Owner will award the contract and issue notice-to-proceed (or notify of no award)within twenty-
one(2 1)calendar days after the date of bid.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Verbal answers are not binding on any parry.
D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 3 working days before date set
for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum. .
3.06 SITE EXAMINATION AND PREBID CONFERENCE
A. A required Pre-Bid Conference and Site Examination has been arranged for bidders at 9:30 AM,
on March 15, 2000, at Smith College Physical Plan Department, 126 West St., Northampton,
MA.
BID SUBMISSION
4.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE
A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed.
B. Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed in a closed opaque
envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project name and Owner's name on the outside.
C. The Owner reserves the right not to share the bid amounts with the bidders.
4.02 BID INELIGIBILITY
A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain
arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the
Owner, be declared unacceptable.
B. Bids are by invitation, only from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders will be returned.
BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS
5.01 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS
A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices.
B. Taxes: Owner is a tax-exempt organization, and will supply tax exemption forms and tax-
excemption number.
5.02 BID FORM SIGNATURE
A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows:
1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also
sign. Insert the words"Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal.
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION
A. The Contract Documents are identified as the Project Manual and the Drawings. The contents of
the Project Manual are delineated in the table of Contents therein. The Drawings are subdivided
into three sets-Site Drawings, Renovations to Hopkins House and Renovations to Wesley House
-and the contents of each set are delineated on the cover sheet of each.
3.03 AVAILABILITY
A. Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc. located at 7 North
Pleasant Street,Amherst, MA 01002.
B. Three sets of Bid Documents can be obtained by general contract bidders free of charge upon
receipt of a refundable deposit, by certified check or company check in the amount of$200 for
three sets.
C. One set of Bid Documents can be obtained by subcontract bidders or suppliers lfree of charge,
upon receipt of a refundable deposit by certified check or company check, in the amount of$75.
D. Deposits will be refunded if Bid Documents are returned complete, undamaged, unmarked and
reusable,within 21 days of bid submission. Failure to comply will result in forfeiture of deposit.
E. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their
use does not grant a license for other purposes.
3.04 EXAMINATION
A. Bid Documents may be viewed at Smith College Physical Plant Department, 126 West Street,
Northampton, MA, at the F.W. Dodge Plan Room at 181 Park Ave W. Springfield, MA 01089
and at the office of the Architect.
B. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the
documents be incomplete.
C. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.
3.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA
A. Direct questions to the Architect, telephone(413)259-1630.
B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract
Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. Addenda will be sent to the F.W. Dodge
Plan Room, and to all who received plans from the Architect. Architect will endeavor to distribute
addenda completely and in a timely fasion, but accepts no responsibility therefor. Responsibility
ROW for obtaining all addenda is exclusively that of the bidders.
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
INVITATION
2.01 BID SUBMISSION
A. Bid Documents will be available at noon, on March 8, 2000, at the office of the Architect
B. Bids signed, executed, and dated will be received by the Owner located at Smith College Physical
Plant Department, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA 01060 before 2:00 pm local standard time
on the 28th day of March, 2000.
C. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.
D. Offers will be opened privately after the time for receipt of bids.
2.02 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction, including general construction,
structural, mechanical, electrical, and site developmen Work.
B. Location: Vicinity of Hopkins and Haven House,Smith College located at Elm Street,
Northampton, Massachusetts.
2.03 CONTRACT TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. Timeframe for Owner occupancy and construction are defined in Section 01100, Summary in the
Project Manual.
B. Time is of the essence in this contract. Excepting delays beyond the control of the Contractor,
Liquidated Damages of$5,000 per calendar day will be charged for faulure to product a Certificate
of Occupancy for both Wesley and Hopkins Houses within the time limits established in Section
01100.
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
3.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Form .
B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2
Renovations to Wesley&Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SUMMARY
1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Invitation
1. Bid Submission
2. Intent
3. Work Identified in the Contract Documents
4. Contract Time
B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents
1. Definitions
2. Contract Documents Identification
3. Availability
4. Examination
5. Inquiries/Addenda
6. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions
C. Site Assessment
1. Site Examination
2. Prebid Conference
D. Bid Submission
1. Bid Depository
2. Submission Procedure
E. Bid Enclosures/Requirements
1. Bid Form Requirements
F. Offer Acceptance/Rejection
1. Duration of Offer.
2. Acceptance of Offer,
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Bid Form.
B. General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions:
1. Tax exempt procedures.
C. Section 01100-Summary: Phases and Contract Time
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
Renovations to Wesley& Ilopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
.yes
INVITATION
2.01 BID SUBMISSION
A. Bid Documents will be available at noon, on March 8, 2000, at the office of the Architect
B. Bids signed, executed, and dated will be received by the Owner located at Smith College Physical
Plant Department, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA 01060 before 2:00 pm local standard time
on the 28th day of March, 2000.
C. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.
D. Offers will be opened privately after the time for receipt of bids.
2.02 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction, including general construction,
structural, mechanical, electrical, and site developmen Work.
B. Location: Vicinity of Hopkins and Haven House, Smith College located at Elm Street,
Northampton, Massachusetts.
2.03 CONTRACT TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A. Timeframe for Owner occupancy and construction are defined in Section 01100, Summary in the
Project Manual.
B. Time is of the essence in this contract. Excepting delays beyond the control of the Contractor,
Liquidated Damages of$5,000 per calendar day will be charged for faulure to product a Certificate
of Occupancy for both Wesley and Hopkins Houses within the time limits established is Section
01100.
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
3.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Form .
B. Contract Documents: Defined in ALA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SUMMARY
1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Invitation
1. Bid Submission
2. Intent
3. Work Identified in the Contract Documents
4. Contract Time
B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents
1. Definitions
2. Contract Documents Identification
3. Availability
4. Examination
5. Inquiries/Addenda
6. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions
C. Site Assessment
1. Site Examination
2. Prebid Conference
D. Bid Submission
1. Bid Depository
2. Submission Procedure
E. Bid Enclosures/Requirements
1. Bid Form Requirements
F. Offer Acceptance/Rejection
1. Duration of Offer.
2. Acceptance of Offer,
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Bid Form.
B. General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions:
1. Tax exempt procedures.
C. Section 01100-Summary: Phases and Contract Time
Project No. 99037/50 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
06401......... Exterior Architectural Woodwork....................................................................................... 6
06402......... Interior Architectural Woodwork........................................................................................ 13
DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07160......... Bituminous Dampproofing.................................................................................................. 4
07210......... Building Insulation............................................................................................................... 6
07315.........Slate Shingles........................................................................................................................ 6
07533.........Thermoplastic Single-ply Membrane Roofing..................................................................... 8
07610.........Sheet Metal Roofing............................................................................................................. 5
07920.........Joint Sealants........................................................................................................................ 9
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110.........Steel Doors And Frames...................................................................................................... 4
08211......... Flush Wood Doors............................................................................................................... 5
08212......... Stile And Rail Wood Doors................................................................................................. 5
08550.........Wood Windows ................................................................................................................... 8
08610......... Roof Windows...................................................................................................................... 5
08711......... Door Hardware .................................................................................................................... 15
08800......... Glazing.................................................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09215......... Gypsum Veneer Plaster........................................................................................................ 7
09511.........Acoustical Panel Ceilings..................................................................................................... 6
09651......... Resilient Tile Flooring.......................................................................................................... 6
09652......... Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings................................................................................................ 6 ..
09654......... Linoleum Floor Coverings................................................................................................... 6
09680......... Carpet................................................................................................................................... 6
09900......... Painting................................................................................................................................. 16
09950.........Wall Coverings..................................................................................................................... 4
09952......... PVC Wall Coverings............................................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10155.........Toilet Compartments........................................................................................................... 4
10801......... Toilet And Bath Accessories................................................................................................ 7
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
12356......... Kitchen Casework................................................................................................................ 6
12494......... Roller Shades........................................................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15300......... Fire Protection...................................................................................................................... 25
15400......... Plumbing............................................................................................................................... 20
15600......... HVAC................................................................................................................................... 47
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
16100......... Electrical ............................................................................................................................... 21
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Division.....Section Title......................................................................................I..................................
......Pages
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100.........Summary............................................................................................................................... 4
01140.........Work Restrictions ................................................................................................................ 2
01230.........Alternates.............................................................................................................................. 2
01250......... Contract Modification Procedures...................................................................................... 2
01290......... Payment Procedures............................................................................................................. 4
01310......... Project Management And Coordination............................................................................. 5
01330.........Submittal Procedures........................................................................................................... 9
01400......... Quality Requirements.......................................................................................................... 5
01500.........Temporary Facilities And Controls..................................................................................... 11
01731......... Cutting And Patching.......................................................................................................... 4
01732.........Selective Demolition............................................................................................................ 8
01770......... Closeout Procedures............................................................................................................. 7
01781......... Project Record Documents.................................................................................................. 4
01782.........Operation And Maintenance Data...................................................................................... 7
DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION
02100.........Site Preparation.................................................................................................................... 11
02110.........Tree and Plant Protection.................................................................................................... 6
02221......... Building Demolition............................................................................................................ 6
02300......... Earthwork............................................................................................................................. 12
02510.........Asphaltic Concrete Paving................................................................................................... 10
02512......... Concrete Paving.................................................................................................................... 5
02525......... Granite Curbs....................................................................................................................... 3
02780......... Unit Pavers........................................................................................................................... 6
02920.........Topsoil.................................................................................................................................. 8
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
03300......... Cast-in-place Concrete.......................................................................................................... 18
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04810......... Unit Masonry Assemblies.................................................................................................... 18
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05500......... Metal Fabrications................................................................................................................ 9
05511......... Metal Stairs........................................................................................................................... 8
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100......... Rough Carpentry.................................................................................................................. 13
06200......... Finish Carpentry .................................................................................................................. 7
PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATIONS TO WESLEY & HOPKINS HOUSES
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
February 28, 2000
Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc.
7 North Pleasant Street
Amherst, MA 01002
413-259-1630
fax 413-259-1621
Landscape Architects
Towers/Golde
85 Willow Street
New Haven,CT 06511
(203) 773-1153
(203) 865-6411
Structural Engineers
Gibble Norden Champion
130 Elm Street
P.O. Box 802
Old Saybrook, CT 06475
(860) 388-1224
fax (860) 388-4613
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers
Lindgren&Sharpies
96 Industry Avenue
Springfield, MA 01104
(413) 732-4336
(413) 731-0786
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
rights as they may have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as
fiduciary.
ARTICLE 13,MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.5 Tests and Inspections is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements.
Particular attention is directed to Section 01400 and specific Sections of the Work.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
pg. 7 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
f. Medical Expense(any one person): $5,000
3. Business Automobile�Liability (including owned, non-owned and
hired vehicles):
a. Bodily Injury: $500,000 per person
$1,000,000 per accident
b. Property Damage: $500,000
C. Medical Payments $5,000
4. Umbrella Excess Liability
a. Each Occurrence: $2,000,000
b. Aggregate: $2,000,000
C. Retention(max.) $10,000
11.1.3 Insert the following sentence after the second sentence:
`The Contractor, at the Owners request, may be required to file a copy of
each policy with the Owner before an exposure to loss may occur or at any
time during the construction period.'
11.4.1.1 The following is added to the end of the Article:
Notwithstanding the definition of the "Work" in Article 1.1.3, and foregoing
wording in this Article 11.4.1, the Contractor assumes all responsibility for the
safety and keeping of all tools and equipment and any materials or products used
to complete or perform the Work, and which do not form a permanent part of
the work. The Contractor waives all rights against the Owner and Architect,
Architect's consultants, and their employees and agents for any loss or damage to
such tools, equipment or any materials or products used to complete or perform
the Work, and which do not form a permanent part of the work. The Contractor
shall require similar waivers in favor of the Owner,Architect,Architect's
consultants, and their employers and agents from all Subcontractors and sub-
subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them.
11.4.1.2 Revise the sentence to read:
If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not
covered because of deductibles, except for those losses caused by the Contractor,
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractors, as per Article 10.2.5., in which case the
deductible amount shall be fully paid by the responsible party.
11.4.6 The following sentence is added to the clause, following the first sentence:
The Owner shall have the option of filing certificates of insurance on each policy,
in lieu of copies of the policies.
11.4.7 The first sentence is amended to read:
...for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property
insurance applicable to the Work, except for deductible ar nounts which the Contractor,
his Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors is responsible per Article 10.1, and except such
pg. 6 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
appear. The certificates of insurance shall indicate the additional insured status, using the
following wording in the "Special Items" box:
`The Trustees of Smith College, and any present or former trustee, director,
officer, administrator, employee,volunteer worker or agent is added as an additional
insured to the General Liability,Auto Employers liability and Excess Policies, as their
interests may appear.
Or by attaching a copy of the endorsement adding the additional insured status to the
certificate.
Add following Subparagraph 11.1.1.9 to 11.1.1:
"11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage, and be
on a comprehensive basis including:
1. Premises and operations (including XCU as applicable).
2. Independent contractor's protective.
3. Products and completed operations.
4. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's
obligation under Paragraph 3.18.
5. Owned, non-owned, and hired motor vehicles.
6. Broad form property damage, including completed operations."
Add following Subparagraph 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2:
"11.1.2.1 Insurance required by Sub-paragraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than
following, or greater if required by law. Coverage shall be written on a "per
occurrence" basis, and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of
commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any
coverage required to be maintained after final payment:
1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability:
a. Statutory - PART A
b. Employers Liability - PART B
Each Accident $500,000
Disease Policy Limit $1,000,000
Disease Each Employee $500,000
2. Comprehensive General Liability, including broad form
endorsement:
a. General Aggregate: $2,000,000
b. Products/Completed Operations Aggregate: $1,000,000
C. Personal and Advertising Injury: $1,000,000
d. Each Occurrence: $1,000,000
e. Fire Damage (any one fire): $50,000
pg. 5 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Add following Sub-sub-paragraph to Sub-paragraph 9.5.1:
"9.5.1.8 Persistent failure to maintain project record &cuments specified in Division One."
9.7.1 Delete this sub-paragraph and substitute the following:
"9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate of Payment, through no fault of the
Contractor, within fourteen days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within fourteen days after
the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the
Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon fourteen
additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until
payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of
the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as
provided for in the Contract Documents."
ARTICLE 10, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Article 10 is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular attention is
directed to Section 01500.
10.2.5 The article is amended to read:
The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (including damage or loss insured under
property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses
10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by any act or failure to actby the Contractor,
Sub-Contractor....and are not the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The fore going obligations
of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. However, if
the damage or loss is insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor is
responsible to remedy the damage or loss, notwithstanding any part of Clause 11.4, up to and including the
amount of the policy deductible.
ARTICLE 11, INSURANCE
11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance
Insurance Companies providing insurance to Contractors, Subcontractors or Sub-
subcontractors shall be rated not less than A-,XI by Best's.
The Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors shall add Smith College, its
trustees, employees,volunteer workers and agents as additional insureds to the General
Liability, Auto Liability, Employers Liability and Excess Liability policies as their interests
pg. 4 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.14 Cutting and Patching is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements.
Particular attention is directed to Section 01731 and 01732.
3.15 Cleaning Up is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Section 0 17 70.
3.18.1 Change the first sentence to read; "...the Contactor shall hold indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner, and their present or former trustees, directors, officers, administrators, employees,
volunteer workers and agents, the Architect,...".
ARTICLE 4,ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2 Architect's Administration of the Contract
4.2.7 This subparagraph is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Sections 01330, 01400and 01770.
4.2.8 This subparagraph is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Section 01250.
4.2.9 This subparagraph is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Sections 01770, 01781 and 01782.
ARTICLE 7, CHANGES IN THE WORK
Article 7 is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular attention is
directed to Section 01250.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1.1 Add the following sub-paragraph 8.1.1.1 to subparagraph 8.1.1:
"8.1.1.1 Contract Time for this project is defined in Division One - General
Requirements, Section 01100. Particular attention is directed to provisions for
Liquidated Damages in Section 01100. "
ARTICLE 9,PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Article 9 is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular attention is
directed to Sections 01250, 01770, 01781 and 01782.
9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification
pg. 3 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
general warranty); advise Architect of any other objections Contractor may have to
specified procedures; and propose alternative procedures."
3.4 Labor and Materials is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Sections 01300, 01400, 01500 and 01600.
3.4.2 Add the following sentence to the end of 3.4.2:
"For purposes of product substitutions, the terms `equal' and `equivalent' are
defined in Division One, Section 01600.
3.5 Warranty is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular attention
is directed to Sections 01400 and 01600.
3.6 Taxes
3.6.1 Add the following sentence to 3.6.1:
"Exception: Owner is exempt from Massachusetts Sales Tax, and will furnish
documentation and tax-exempt number to Contractor accordingly."
3.7 Permits and Fees
3.7.1 Delete Sub-paragraph 3.7.1 and substitute following:
"Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
secure and pay for the building permit; all plumbing, fire protection, mechanical
and electrical permits and inspections; all sanitary,water and electrical tie-in
permits and fees; and all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and
inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are
customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required
when bids are received or negotiations concluded.
3.10 Contractor's Construction Schedules is supplemented in Division One-General
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Section 01310& 010330.
3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site are supplemented in Division One-General
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Sections 01300, 01400 and 01600.
3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, is supplemented in Division One-General
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Sections 01330 and 01400.
3.13 Use of Site is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular attention
is directed to Section 01140 and 01500.
pg. 2 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations to Wesley& Hopkins Houses
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
e
ARTICLE 1,GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1.1 Add the additional items to the list of Contract Documents given in Sub-paragraph 1.1.1:
Add new sub-paragraph 1.1.5.1 as follows:
".l The Drawings of this Contract shall be as listed on the Cover Sheet.
1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1 Delete second sentence and replace with following:
"In event of conflicts or discrepancies among Contract Documents,
interpretations will be based on following priorities:
1. Agreement
2. Addenda,with those of later date having precedence over those of
earlier date
3. Supplementary General Conditions
4. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
5. Drawings and Specifications
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either
Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of
Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
Performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with
the Contract Documents as interpreted in the previous paragraph, and reasonably
inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results."
3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures is supplemented in Division One-General
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Sections 01100 and 01300.
3.3.1 Add the following sentence to the end of 3.3.1:
"Contractor shall review specified construction or installation procedures
(including those recommended by manufacturers or national standard-setting
organizations); advise Architect if following any specified procedures deviates from
good construction practice, or will affect any warranties (including Contractor's
pg. 1 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
�7 t
Y �
r�
4R
PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATIONS TOW SLEY & HOPKINS HO S
W 'e t'fITOV I/ ; �
LIE'lGIE(f
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
February 28, 2000